blob: dcddc4ac4184284cd3ed919e6d48cf788d869028 [file] [log] [blame]
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001/*
Johannes Berg3017b802007-08-28 17:01:53 -04002 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +02006 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Johannes Bergd98ad832014-09-03 15:24:57 +03007 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07008 *
9 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
10 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
11 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
12 */
13
14#ifndef MAC80211_H
15#define MAC80211_H
16
Paul Gortmaker187f1882011-11-23 20:12:59 -050017#include <linux/bug.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070018#include <linux/kernel.h>
19#include <linux/if_ether.h>
20#include <linux/skbuff.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070021#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070022#include <net/cfg80211.h>
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +020023#include <asm/unaligned.h>
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070024
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040025/**
26 * DOC: Introduction
27 *
28 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
29 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
30 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
31 * drivers.
32 */
33
34/**
35 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
36 *
37 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070038 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
39 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
40 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +010041 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
42 * tasklet function.
43 *
44 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -070045 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070046 */
47
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040048/**
49 * DOC: Warning
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070050 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040051 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
52 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
53 */
54
55/**
56 * DOC: Frame format
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070057 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -040058 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
59 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
60 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
61 * hardware.
62 *
63 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
64 *
65 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
66 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
67 *
68 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
69 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -070070 */
71
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +020072/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040073 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
74 *
75 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
76 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
77 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
78 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
79 *
80 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
81 * suspend.
82 *
83 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
84 *
85 */
86
Paul Gortmaker313162d2012-01-30 11:46:54 -050087struct device;
88
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -040089/**
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020090 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
91 *
92 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010093 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020094 */
95enum ieee80211_max_queues {
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +020096 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
Johannes Berg445ea4e2013-02-13 12:25:28 +010097 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +020098};
99
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200100#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
101
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +0200102/**
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800103 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
104 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
105 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
106 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
107 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
108 */
109enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
110 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
111 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
112 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
113 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
114};
Johannes Berg948d8872011-09-29 16:04:29 +0200115#define IEEE80211_NUM_ACS 4
Johannes Berg4bce22b2010-11-16 11:49:58 -0800116
117/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400118 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
119 *
120 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100121 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400122 *
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -0400123 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200124 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
125 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400126 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100127 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300128 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +0200129 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -0400130 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700131struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200132 u16 txop;
Johannes Berg3330d7b2008-02-10 16:49:38 +0100133 u16 cw_min;
134 u16 cw_max;
Johannes Bergf434b2d2008-07-10 11:22:31 +0200135 u8 aifs;
Alexander Bondar908f8d02013-04-07 09:53:30 +0300136 bool acm;
Kalle Valoab133152010-01-12 10:42:31 +0200137 bool uapsd;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700138};
139
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700140struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
141 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
142 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
143 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
144 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
145};
146
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100147/**
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200148 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100149 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200150 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100151 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200152 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
153 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200154 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200155 */
156enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100157 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200158 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100159 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +0200160 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200161 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200162};
163
164/**
165 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
166 *
167 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
168 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
169 *
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100170 * @def: the channel definition
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200171 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200172 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
173 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
174 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
175 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
Simon Wunderlich5d7fad42012-11-30 19:17:28 +0100176 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100177 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200178 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
179 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
180 */
181struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100182 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
Eliad Peller21f659b2013-11-11 20:14:01 +0200183 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200184
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +0200185 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
186
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +0100187 bool radar_enabled;
188
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +0100189 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +0200190};
191
192/**
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +0300193 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
194 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
195 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
196 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
197 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
198 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
199 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
200 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
201 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
202 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
203 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
204 * for changes/removal.)
205 */
206enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
207 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
208 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
209};
210
211/**
212 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
213 *
214 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
215 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
216 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
217 * done.
218 *
219 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
220 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
221 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
222 */
223struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
224 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
226 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
227};
228
229/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100230 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
231 *
232 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
233 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
234 *
235 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
236 * also implies a change in the AID.
237 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
238 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300239 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
Tomas Winkler38668c02008-03-28 16:33:32 -0700240 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200241 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200242 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200243 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
244 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
245 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
246 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
247 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
248 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200249 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200250 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300251 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200252 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
253 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200254 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200255 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200256 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300257 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200258 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100259 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
260 * changed (currently only in P2P client mode, GO mode will be later)
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300261 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
262 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100263 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
264 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
265 * context had been assigned.
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100266 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100267 */
268enum ieee80211_bss_change {
269 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
270 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
271 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300272 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
Alexander Simona7ce1c92011-09-18 00:16:45 +0200273 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200274 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg57c4d7b2009-04-23 16:10:04 +0200275 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200276 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
277 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
278 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200279 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200280 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300281 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200282 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200283 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300284 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +0200285 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300286 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200287 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
Johannes Berg488dd7b2012-10-29 20:08:01 +0100288 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300289 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
Johannes Berg2c9b7352013-02-07 21:37:29 +0100290 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
Rostislav Lisovy239281f2014-11-03 10:33:19 +0100291 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
Johannes Bergac8dd502010-05-05 09:44:02 +0200292
293 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100294};
295
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300296/*
297 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
298 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
299 * filtering will be disabled.
300 */
301#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
302
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100303/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200304 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
305 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200306 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700307 */
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200308enum ieee80211_event_type {
309 RSSI_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200310 MLME_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200311};
312
313/**
314 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
315 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
316 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
317 */
318enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -0700319 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
320 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
321};
322
323/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200324 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
325 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
326 */
327struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
328 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
329};
330
331/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200332 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
333 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200334 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200335 */
336enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
337 AUTH_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbachd0d1a122015-03-16 23:23:36 +0200338 ASSOC_EVENT,
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200339};
340
341/**
342 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
343 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
344 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
345 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
346 */
347enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
348 MLME_SUCCESS,
349 MLME_DENIED,
350 MLME_TIMEOUT,
351};
352
353/**
354 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
355 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
356 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
357 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
358 */
359struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
360 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
361 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
362 u16 reason;
363};
364
365/**
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200366 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
367 * @type The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
368 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200369 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200370 */
371struct ieee80211_event {
372 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
373 union {
374 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
Emmanuel Grumbacha9409092015-03-16 23:23:35 +0200375 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +0200376 } u;
377};
378
379/**
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100380 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
381 *
382 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
383 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
384 *
385 * @assoc: association status
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200386 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
387 * or not
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530388 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100389 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
390 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +0200391 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble;
392 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
393 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE hardware flag
394 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP);
395 * if the hardware cannot handle this it must set the
396 * IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE hardware flag
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +0100397 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +0200398 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
Alexander Bondar989c6502013-05-16 17:34:17 +0300399 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200400 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100401 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
402 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
403 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
404 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200405 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200406 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
407 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200408 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100409 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
410 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
Alexander Bondar2ecc3902015-03-01 09:10:00 +0200411 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
412 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
413 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700414 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800415 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
Johannes Berg96dd22a2008-09-11 00:01:57 +0200416 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
417 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
418 * the current band.
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300419 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100420 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200421 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
422 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100423 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
424 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
Johannes Berg074d46d2012-03-15 19:45:16 +0100425 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200426 * This field is only valid when the channel type is one of the HT types.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200427 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
428 * implies disabled
429 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300430 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
431 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
432 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
433 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100434 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
435 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
436 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200437 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200438 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
439 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
440 * your driver/device needs to do.
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300441 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
442 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
Marek Puzyniak0ca54f62013-04-10 13:19:13 +0200443 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300444 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
445 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200446 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100447 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
448 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
449 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
450 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
451 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
452 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100453 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100454 */
455struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200456 const u8 *bssid;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100457 /* association related data */
Johannes Berg8fc214b2010-04-28 17:40:43 +0200458 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
Sujith Manoharanc13a7652012-10-12 17:35:45 +0530459 bool ibss_creator;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100460 u16 aid;
461 /* erp related data */
462 bool use_cts_prot;
463 bool use_short_preamble;
Jouni Malinen9f1ba902008-08-07 20:07:01 +0300464 bool use_short_slot;
Johannes Berg2d0ddec2009-04-23 16:13:26 +0200465 bool enable_beacon;
Emmanuel Grumbach98f7dfd2008-07-18 13:52:59 +0800466 u8 dtim_period;
Tomas Winkler21c0cbe2008-03-28 16:33:34 -0700467 u16 beacon_int;
468 u16 assoc_capability;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +0200469 u64 sync_tsf;
470 u32 sync_device_ts;
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +0100471 u8 sync_dtim_count;
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +0100472 u32 basic_rates;
Alexander Bondar817cee72013-05-19 14:23:57 +0300473 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
Felix Fietkaudd5b4cc2010-11-22 20:58:24 +0100474 int mcast_rate[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg9ed6bcc2009-05-08 20:47:39 +0200475 u16 ht_operation_mode;
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +0200476 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
477 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
Johannes Berg4bf88532012-11-09 11:39:59 +0100478 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Juuso Oikarinen68542962010-06-09 13:43:26 +0300479 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
Johannes Berg0f19b412013-01-14 16:39:07 +0100480 int arp_addr_cnt;
Johannes Berg4ced3f72010-07-19 16:39:04 +0200481 bool qos;
Johannes Berg7da7cc12010-08-05 17:02:38 +0200482 bool idle;
Eliad Pellerab095872012-07-27 12:33:22 +0300483 bool ps;
Arik Nemtsov78274932011-09-04 11:11:32 +0300484 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
485 size_t ssid_len;
486 bool hidden_ssid;
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +0200487 int txpower;
Lorenzo Bianconidb82d8a2015-01-14 12:55:08 +0100488 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
Janusz Dziedzic67baf662013-03-21 15:47:56 +0100489 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +0100490};
491
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800492/**
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200493 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800494 *
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700495 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800496 *
Johannes Berg7351c6b2009-11-19 01:08:30 +0100497 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200498 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
499 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
500 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
501 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
502 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
503 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
504 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
505 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
506 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
507 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
508 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200509 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200510 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
511 * station
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200512 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200513 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
514 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200515 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200516 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
Johannes Bergab5b5342009-08-07 16:28:09 +0200517 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
518 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
519 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
520 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
521 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
522 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
523 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
524 * hardware queue.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200525 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
526 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
527 * is for the whole aggregation.
Ron Rindjunsky429a3802008-07-01 14:16:03 +0300528 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
529 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200530 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
531 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
532 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600533 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
534 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
535 * off-channel operation.
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100536 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
537 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
538 * it can be sent out.
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200539 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
540 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200541 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
542 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100543 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
544 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
545 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200546 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
547 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
548 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
549 * queue gets full.
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100550 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
551 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
552 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100553 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
554 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
555 * should kick the MLME state machine.
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200556 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
557 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
558 * status to user space)
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400559 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200560 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
561 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
Johannes Berg610dbc92011-01-06 22:36:44 +0100562 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
563 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
564 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
565 * handled properly by the device.
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200566 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
567 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
568 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530569 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
570 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
571 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200572 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
573 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
574 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +0200575 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
576 * PS-Poll responses.
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530577 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
578 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
579 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200580 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
581 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
582 * monitor injection).
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530583 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
584 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
585 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
586 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
587 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200588 *
589 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
590 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800591 */
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200592enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200593 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200594 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
595 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
596 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
597 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
598 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
599 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
600 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
601 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
602 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
603 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
604 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
605 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
Seth Forshee6c17b772013-02-11 11:21:07 -0600606 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
Johannes Bergcd8ffc82009-03-23 17:28:41 +0100607 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
Johannes Berg8f77f382009-06-07 21:58:37 +0200608 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
Johannes Berg3b8d81e02009-06-17 17:43:56 +0200609 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100610 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
Johannes Bergad5351d2009-08-07 16:42:15 +0200611 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
Johannes Bergc6fcf6b2010-01-17 01:47:59 +0100612 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
Johannes Berg1672c0e32013-01-29 15:02:27 +0100613 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
Jouni Malinen026331c2010-02-15 12:53:10 +0200614 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
Luis R. Rodriguez0a56bd02010-04-15 17:39:37 -0400615 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
Felix Fietkauf79d9ba2010-04-19 19:57:35 +0200616 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +0100617 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
Jouni Malinen681d1192011-02-03 18:35:19 +0200618 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
Rajkumar Manoharanaad14ce2011-09-25 14:53:31 +0530619 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200620 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
Rajkumar Manoharanb6f35302011-09-29 20:34:04 +0530621 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
Johannes Berga26eb272011-10-07 14:01:25 +0200622 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
Sujith Manoharan5cf16612014-12-10 21:26:11 +0530623 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200624};
625
Johannes Bergabe37c42010-06-07 11:12:27 +0200626#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
627
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200628/**
629 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
630 *
631 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
632 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530633 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
634 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200635 *
636 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
637 */
638enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
639 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
Sujith Manoharan6b127c72014-12-10 21:26:10 +0530640 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200641};
642
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200643/*
644 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
645 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
646 */
647#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
648 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
649 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
650 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
651 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +0100652 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200653 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +0200654 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
Christian Lampartereb7d3062010-09-21 21:36:18 +0200655
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530656/**
657 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
658 * Rate Control algorithm.
659 *
660 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
661 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
662 *
663 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
664 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
665 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
666 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
667 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100668 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
669 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530670 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
671 * Greenfield mode.
672 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100673 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
674 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
675 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
Sujith2134e7e2009-01-22 09:00:52 +0530676 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
677 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
678 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
679 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
680 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200681enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
682 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
683 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
684 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
685
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100686 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200687 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
688 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
689 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
690 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
691 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100692 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
693 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
694 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
Ron Rindjunsky11f4b1c2008-03-04 18:09:26 -0800695};
696
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200697
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200698/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
699#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200700
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200701/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
702#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
703
704/* maximum number of rate stages */
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200705#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200706
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200707/* maximum number of rate table entries */
708#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
709
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200710/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200711 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200712 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200713 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
714 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
Johannes Berge25cf4a2008-10-23 08:51:20 +0200715 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200716 *
717 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
718 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
719 *
720 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
721 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
Johannes Bergc555b9b2009-08-07 16:23:43 +0200722 *
723 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
724 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
725 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
726 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
727 * information
728 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
729 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
730 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
731 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
732 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
733 * information should then contain
734 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
735 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
736 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200737 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200738struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
739 s8 idx;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100740 u16 count:5,
741 flags:11;
Gustavo F. Padovan3f30fc12010-07-21 10:59:58 +0000742} __packed;
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +0200743
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100744#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
745
746static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
747 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
748{
749 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200750 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
751 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100752}
753
754static inline u8
755ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
756{
757 return rate->idx & 0xF;
758}
759
760static inline u8
761ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
762{
Karl Beldan6bc83122013-04-15 17:09:29 +0200763 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
Johannes Berg8bc83c22012-11-09 18:38:32 +0100764}
765
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200766/**
767 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200768 *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200769 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
770 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
771 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
772 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
773 *
774 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200775 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200776 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100777 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -0700778 * @control: union for control data
779 * @status: union for status data
780 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100781 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700782 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100783 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
Daniel Halperin93d95b12010-04-18 09:28:18 -0700784 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200785 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
Ivo van Doorn1c014422008-04-17 19:41:02 +0200786 */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200787struct ieee80211_tx_info {
788 /* common information */
789 u32 flags;
790 u8 band;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200791
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +0200792 u8 hw_queue;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100793
Johannes Berga729cff2011-11-06 14:13:34 +0100794 u16 ack_frame_id;
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +0100795
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200796 union {
797 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200798 union {
799 /* rate control */
800 struct {
801 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
802 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
803 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200804 u8 use_rts:1;
805 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200806 u8 short_preamble:1;
807 u8 skip_table:1;
Felix Fietkau991fec02013-04-16 13:38:43 +0200808 /* 2 bytes free */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200809 };
810 /* only needed before rate control */
811 unsigned long jiffies;
812 };
Johannes Berg25d834e2008-09-12 22:52:47 +0200813 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200814 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
815 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
Johannes Bergaf61a162013-07-02 18:09:12 +0200816 u32 flags;
817 /* 4 bytes free */
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200818 } control;
819 struct {
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200820 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Eliad Pellera0f995a2014-03-13 14:30:47 +0200821 s32 ack_signal;
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200822 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
Felix Fietkau599bf6a2009-11-15 23:07:30 +0100823 u8 ampdu_len;
Johannes Bergd748b462012-03-28 11:04:23 +0200824 u8 antenna;
Johannes Berg02219b32014-10-07 10:38:50 +0300825 u16 tx_time;
826 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200827 } status;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200828 struct {
829 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
830 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +0200831 u8 pad[4];
832
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200833 void *rate_driver_data[
834 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
835 };
836 void *driver_data[
837 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200838 };
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -0700839};
840
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +0300841/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200842 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
843 *
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +0200844 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
845 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
846 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +0200847 *
848 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
849 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
850 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
851 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
852 */
853struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
854 const u8 *ies[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
855 size_t len[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
856 const u8 *common_ies;
857 size_t common_ie_len;
858};
859
860
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +0200861static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
862{
863 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
864}
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400865
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +0200866static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
867{
868 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
869}
870
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200871/**
872 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
873 *
874 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
875 *
876 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
877 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
878 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
879 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
880 *
881 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
882 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
883 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
884 */
885static inline void
886ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
887{
888 int i;
889
890 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
891 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
892 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
893 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
894 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
895 /* clear the rate counts */
896 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
897 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
898
899 BUILD_BUG_ON(
Thomas Huehne3e1a0b2012-07-02 19:46:16 +0200900 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +0200901 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
902 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
903 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
904}
905
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400906
907/**
908 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
909 *
910 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
911 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
912 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
913 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400914 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
915 * verification has been done by the hardware.
916 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV/ICV are stripped from this frame.
917 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
918 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
Johannes Berg72abd812007-09-17 01:29:22 -0400919 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
920 * the frame.
921 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
922 * the frame.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800923 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
Johannes Berg6ebacbb2011-02-23 15:06:08 +0100924 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
925 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
926 * merging.
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800927 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
928 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
929 * (including FCS) was received.
Bruno Randolfb4f28bb2008-07-30 17:19:55 +0200930 * @RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200931 * @RX_FLAG_HT: HT MCS was used and rate_idx is MCS index
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100932 * @RX_FLAG_VHT: VHT MCS was used and rate_index is MCS index
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +0200933 * @RX_FLAG_40MHZ: HT40 (40 MHz) was used
934 * @RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
Felix Fietkaufe8431f2012-03-01 18:00:07 +0100935 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
936 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +0200937 * @RX_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission, if
938 * the driver fills this value it should add %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
939 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200940 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
941 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
942 * each A-MPDU
943 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN: driver reports 0-length subframes
944 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN: This is a zero-length subframe, for
945 * monitoring purposes only
946 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
947 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
948 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
949 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
950 * on this subframe
951 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
952 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200953 * @RX_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200954 * @RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200955 * @RX_FLAG_10MHZ: 10 MHz (half channel) was used
956 * @RX_FLAG_5MHZ: 5 MHz (quarter channel) was used
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200957 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
958 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
959 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
960 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
961 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
962 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
963 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
964 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
965 * interleaved with other frames.
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100966 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
967 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
968 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400969 */
970enum mac80211_rx_flags {
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200971 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
972 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
973 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
974 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
975 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
976 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800977 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +0200978 RX_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(8),
979 RX_FLAG_HT = BIT(9),
980 RX_FLAG_40MHZ = BIT(10),
981 RX_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(11),
982 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(12),
983 RX_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(13),
984 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(14),
985 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_REPORT_ZEROLEN = BIT(15),
986 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_ZEROLEN = BIT(16),
987 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(17),
988 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(18),
989 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(19),
990 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(20),
Thomas Pedersenf4bda332012-11-13 10:46:27 -0800991 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(21),
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +0100992 RX_FLAG_VHT = BIT(22),
Emmanuel Grumbach63c361f2014-02-05 12:48:53 +0200993 RX_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(23),
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +0200994 RX_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(26) | BIT(27),
Simon Wunderlicha5e70692013-07-08 16:55:52 +0200995 RX_FLAG_10MHZ = BIT(28),
996 RX_FLAG_5MHZ = BIT(29),
Michal Kazior0cfcefe2013-09-23 15:34:38 +0200997 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(30),
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +0100998 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(31),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -0400999};
1000
Oleksij Rempel786677d2013-05-24 12:05:45 +02001001#define RX_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 26
1002
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001003/**
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001004 * enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags - receive VHT flags
1005 *
1006 * These flags are used with the @vht_flag member of
1007 * &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1008 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ: 80 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001009 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ: 160 MHz was used
Emmanuel Grumbachfb378c22014-03-04 10:35:25 +02001010 * @RX_VHT_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001011 */
1012enum mac80211_rx_vht_flags {
1013 RX_VHT_FLAG_80MHZ = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergf89903d2015-01-15 16:02:46 +01001014 RX_VHT_FLAG_160MHZ = BIT(1),
1015 RX_VHT_FLAG_BF = BIT(2),
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001016};
1017
1018/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001019 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1020 *
1021 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1022 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02001023 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001024 *
Bruno Randolfc132bec2008-02-18 11:20:51 +09001025 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1026 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001027 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1028 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001029 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001030 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001031 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1032 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1033 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001034 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1035 * values were filled.
1036 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1037 * support dB or unspecified units)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001038 * @antenna: antenna used
Jouni Malinen0fb8ca42008-12-12 14:38:33 +02001039 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001040 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1041 * @vht_nss: number of streams (VHT only)
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001042 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_*
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001043 * @vht_flag: %RX_VHT_FLAG_*
Johannes Berg554891e2010-09-24 12:38:25 +02001044 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001045 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1046 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1047 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001048 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001049struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1050 u64 mactime;
Johannes Berg8c358bc2012-05-22 22:13:05 +02001051 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001052 u32 ampdu_reference;
1053 u32 flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001054 u16 freq;
Emmanuel Grumbach1b8d2422014-02-05 16:37:11 +02001055 u8 vht_flag;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001056 u8 rate_idx;
Johannes Berg56146182012-11-09 15:07:02 +01001057 u8 vht_nss;
Johannes Berg30f42292012-07-05 13:14:18 +02001058 u8 rx_flags;
1059 u8 band;
1060 u8 antenna;
1061 s8 signal;
Felix Fietkauef0621e2013-04-22 16:29:31 +02001062 u8 chains;
1063 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
Johannes Berg4c298672012-07-05 11:34:31 +02001064 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001065};
1066
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001067/**
Johannes Berg1f7bba72014-11-06 22:56:36 +01001068 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1069 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1070 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1071 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1072 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1073 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1074 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1075 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1076 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1077 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1078 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1079 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1080 * @data field.
1081 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1082 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1083 * length
1084 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1085 *
1086 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1087 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1088 * data.
1089 */
1090struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1091 u32 present;
1092 u8 align;
1093 u8 oui[3];
1094 u8 subns;
1095 u8 pad;
1096 u16 len;
1097 u8 data[];
1098} __packed;
1099
1100/**
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001101 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1102 *
1103 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1104 *
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001105 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1106 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1107 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02001108 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1109 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1110 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1111 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1112 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1113 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1114 * for more.
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001115 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1116 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1117 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1118 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1119 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001120 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1121 * operating channel.
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001122 */
1123enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001124 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
Johannes Bergae5eb022008-10-14 16:58:37 +02001125 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001126 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
Felix Fietkau45521242010-07-28 02:40:49 +02001127 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001128};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001129
Johannes Berg7a5158e2008-10-08 10:59:33 +02001130
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001131/**
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001132 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1133 *
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001134 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001135 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001136 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001137 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
Johannes Berg47979382009-01-07 10:13:27 +01001138 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001139 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001140 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001141 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001142 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1143 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001144 */
1145enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001146 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001147 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0869aea2009-10-28 10:03:35 +01001148 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001149 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
Johannes Berge255d5e2009-04-22 12:40:07 +02001150 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1151 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1152 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg5cff20e2009-04-29 12:26:17 +02001153 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001154};
1155
1156/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001157 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1158 *
Kalle Valo9d173fc2010-01-14 13:09:14 +02001159 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1160 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1161 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1162 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1163 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001164 */
1165enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1166 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1167 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1168 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1169 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1170
1171 /* keep last */
1172 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1173};
1174
1175/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001176 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1177 *
1178 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1179 *
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001180 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1181 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001182 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001183 * @max_sleep_period: the maximum number of beacon intervals to sleep for
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001184 * before checking the beacon for a TIM bit (managed mode only); this
1185 * value will be only achievable between DTIM frames, the hardware
1186 * needs to check for the multicast traffic bit in DTIM beacons.
1187 * This variable is valid only when the CONF_PS flag is set.
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001188 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1189 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1190 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001191 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1192 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1193 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1194 *
Johannes Berg1ea6f9c2012-10-24 10:59:25 +02001195 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1196 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001197 *
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001198 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001199 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
Johannes Berg04fe2032009-04-22 18:44:37 +02001200 *
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001201 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001202 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1203 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001204 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001205 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1206 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001207 *
1208 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1209 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
Johannes Berg04ecd252012-09-11 14:34:12 +02001210 * configured for an HT channel.
1211 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1212 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001213 */
1214struct ieee80211_conf {
Johannes Berg6b301cd2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001215 u32 flags;
Juuso Oikarinenff616382010-06-09 09:51:52 +03001216 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
Johannes Berg9ccebe62009-04-23 10:32:36 +02001217 int max_sleep_period;
Ron Rindjunsky10816d42007-11-26 16:14:30 +02001218
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001219 u16 listen_interval;
Johannes Berg56007a02010-01-26 14:19:52 +01001220 u8 ps_dtim_period;
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02001221
Johannes Berg9124b072008-10-14 19:17:54 +02001222 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1223
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01001224 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01001225 bool radar_enabled;
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01001226 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001227};
1228
1229/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001230 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1231 *
1232 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1233 * operation.
1234 *
1235 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1236 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1237 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1238 * the driver passed into mac80211.
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001239 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1240 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001241 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1242 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001243 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001244 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1245 */
1246struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1247 u64 timestamp;
Luciano Coelho2ba45382014-10-08 09:48:35 +03001248 u32 device_timestamp;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001249 bool block_tx;
Johannes Berg85220d72013-03-25 18:29:27 +01001250 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02001251 u8 count;
1252};
1253
1254/**
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001255 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1256 *
1257 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1258 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001259 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1260 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1261 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1262 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001263 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1264 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1265 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1266 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001267 */
1268enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1269 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01001270 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001271 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001272};
1273
1274/**
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001275 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1276 *
1277 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1278 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1279 *
Johannes Berg51fb61e2007-12-19 01:31:27 +01001280 * @type: type of this virtual interface
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001281 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1282 * or the BSS we're associated to
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001283 * @addr: address of this interface
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001284 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1285 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
Michal Kazior59af6922014-04-09 15:10:59 +02001286 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1287 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1288 * for read access.
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001289 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1290 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1291 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1292 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001293 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1294 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001295 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1296 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1297 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1298 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1299 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001300 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001301 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001302 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001303 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1304 * sizeof(void *).
1305 */
1306struct ieee80211_vif {
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001307 enum nl80211_iftype type;
Johannes Bergbda39332008-10-11 01:51:51 +02001308 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
Johannes Berg47846c92009-11-25 17:46:19 +01001309 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02001310 bool p2p;
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02001311 bool csa_active;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001312
1313 u8 cab_queue;
1314 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1315
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001316 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1317
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01001318 u32 driver_flags;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001319
Stanislaw Gruszkaddbfe862013-03-08 14:46:14 +01001320#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1321 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1322#endif
1323
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001324 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001325 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001326};
1327
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001328static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1329{
1330#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
Johannes Berg05c914f2008-09-11 00:01:58 +02001331 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
Johannes Berg902acc72008-02-23 15:17:19 +01001332#endif
1333 return false;
1334}
1335
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001336/**
Johannes Bergad7e7182013-11-13 13:37:47 +01001337 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1338 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1339 *
1340 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1341 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1342 *
1343 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1344 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1345 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1346 */
1347struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1348
1349/**
Emmanuel Grumbachdc5a1ad2015-03-12 08:53:24 +02001350 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1351 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1352 *
1353 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1354 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1355 *
1356 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1357 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1358 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1359 */
1360struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1361
1362/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001363 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1364 *
1365 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1366 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1367 *
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001368 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1369 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001370 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1371 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001372 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1373 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1374 * generation in software.
Ivo van Doornc6adbd22008-04-17 21:11:18 +02001375 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1376 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001377 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001378 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1379 * (MFP) to be done in software.
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001380 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
Janusz.Dziedzic@tieto.comee701082012-05-09 08:11:20 +03001381 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
Arik Nemtsov077a9152011-10-23 08:21:41 +02001382 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001383 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1384 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1385 * MIC.
Johannes Berge548c492012-09-04 17:08:23 +02001386 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1387 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1388 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1389 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1390 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1391 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1392 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001393 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02001394 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001395 * only for managment frames (MFP).
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001396 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1397 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1398 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001399 */
1400enum ieee80211_key_flags {
Marek Kwaczynski17d38fa2014-04-14 11:27:21 +02001401 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1402 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1403 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1404 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1405 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1406 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1407 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
Ido Yarivdb128472015-01-06 08:39:02 -05001408 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001409};
1410
1411/**
1412 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1413 *
1414 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1415 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1416 *
1417 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1418 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001419 * encrypted in hardware.
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001420 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001421 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1422 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1423 * @keylen: key material length
Luis R. Rodriguezffd78912008-06-21 10:02:46 -04001424 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1425 * data block:
1426 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1427 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1428 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01001429 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1430 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001431 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001432struct ieee80211_key_conf {
Johannes Berg97359d12010-08-10 09:46:38 +02001433 u32 cipher;
Felix Fietkau76708de2008-10-05 18:02:48 +02001434 u8 icv_len;
1435 u8 iv_len;
Johannes Berg6a7664d2007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001436 u8 hw_key_idx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001437 u8 flags;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001438 s8 keyidx;
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001439 u8 keylen;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001440 u8 key[0];
1441};
1442
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001443/**
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001444 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1445 *
1446 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1447 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1448 *
1449 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1450 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1451 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1452 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1453 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1454 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1455 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1456 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1457 * key_idx value calculation:
1458 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1459 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1460 */
1461struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1462 u32 cipher;
1463 u16 iftype;
1464 u8 hdr_len;
1465 u8 pn_len;
1466 u8 pn_off;
1467 u8 key_idx_off;
1468 u8 key_idx_mask;
1469 u8 key_idx_shift;
1470 u8 mic_len;
1471};
1472
1473/**
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001474 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1475 *
1476 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1477 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1478 *
1479 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1480 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1481 */
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001482enum set_key_cmd {
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04001483 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04001484};
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001485
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001486/**
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01001487 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1488 *
1489 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1490 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1491 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1492 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1493 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1494 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1495 */
1496enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1497 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1498 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1499 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1500 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1501 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1502 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1503};
1504
1505/**
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001506 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1507 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1508 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1509 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1510 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1511 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1512 *
1513 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1514 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1515 */
1516enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1517 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1518 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1519 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1520 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1521};
1522
1523/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001524 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1525 *
1526 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001527 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001528 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1529 */
1530struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1531 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1532 struct {
1533 s8 idx;
1534 u8 count;
1535 u8 count_cts;
1536 u8 count_rts;
1537 u16 flags;
1538 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1539};
1540
1541/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001542 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1543 *
1544 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1545 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1546 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1547 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1548 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01001549 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001550 *
1551 * @addr: MAC address
1552 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
Johannes Berg323ce792008-09-11 02:45:11 +02001553 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
Johannes Berg55d942f2013-03-01 13:07:48 +01001554 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1555 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
Johannes Berga74a8c82014-07-22 14:50:47 +02001556 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001557 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1558 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
Eliad Peller910868d2011-09-11 09:46:55 +03001559 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1560 * if wme is supported.
1561 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001562 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001563 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1564 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1565 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1566 * the station moves to associated state.
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001567 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
Robert P. J. Day03f831a2013-05-02 07:15:09 -04001568 * @rates: rate control selection table
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001569 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001570 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1571 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
SenthilKumar Jegadeesan64a8cef2015-03-02 13:29:40 +05301572 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001573 */
1574struct ieee80211_sta {
Johannes Berg881d9482009-01-21 15:13:48 +01001575 u32 supp_rates[IEEE80211_NUM_BANDS];
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001576 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1577 u16 aid;
Johannes Bergd9fe60d2008-10-09 12:13:49 +02001578 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
Mahesh Palivela818255e2012-10-10 11:33:04 +00001579 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
Arik Nemtsov39df6002011-06-27 23:58:45 +03001580 bool wme;
Eliad Peller9533b4a2011-08-23 14:37:47 +03001581 u8 uapsd_queues;
1582 u8 max_sp;
Johannes Berg8921d042012-12-27 18:26:42 +01001583 u8 rx_nss;
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01001584 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
Johannes Bergaf0ed692013-02-12 14:21:00 +01001585 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001586 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
Arik Nemtsov0c4972c2014-05-01 10:17:27 +03001587 bool tdls;
Arik Nemtsov8b941482014-10-22 12:32:48 +03001588 bool tdls_initiator;
SenthilKumar Jegadeesan64a8cef2015-03-02 13:29:40 +05301589 bool mfp;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001590
1591 /* must be last */
Johannes Berg1c06ef92012-12-28 12:22:02 +01001592 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001593};
1594
1595/**
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001596 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1597 *
1598 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
Sujith38a6cc72010-05-19 11:32:30 +05301599 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
Tomas Winkler478f8d22007-09-30 13:52:37 +02001600 *
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001601 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1602 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1603 */
Christian Lamparter89fad572008-12-09 16:28:06 +01001604enum sta_notify_cmd {
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01001605 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1606};
1607
1608/**
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02001609 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1610 *
1611 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1612 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1613 */
1614struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1615 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1616};
1617
1618/**
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001619 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1620 *
1621 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1622 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1623 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1624 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1625 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1626 *
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001627 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1628 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1629 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1630 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1631 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1632 * algorithm.
1633 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1634 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1635 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1636 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1637 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1638 * CCK frames.
1639 *
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001640 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1641 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1642 * the FCS at the end.
1643 *
1644 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1645 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1646 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1647 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1648 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1649 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07001650 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001651 *
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001652 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE:
1653 * Hardware is not capable of short slot operation on the 2.4 GHz band.
1654 *
1655 * @IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE:
1656 * Hardware is not capable of receiving frames with short preamble on
1657 * the 2.4 GHz band.
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001658 *
1659 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1660 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1661 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1662 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1663 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001664 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1665 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1666 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1667 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1668 *
Tomas Winkler06ff47b2008-06-18 17:53:44 +03001669 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1670 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1671 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
Sujith8b30b1f2008-10-24 09:55:27 +05301672 *
1673 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1674 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
Kalle Valo520eb822008-12-18 23:35:27 +02001675 *
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01001676 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1677 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1678 *
1679 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1680 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1681 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1682 *
1683 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1684 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
Jouni Malinen4375d082009-01-08 13:32:11 +02001685 *
1686 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1687 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02001688 *
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301689 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1690 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1691 * the stack.
1692 *
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001693 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001694 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1695 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02001696 *
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001697 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1698 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1699 * dtim_period).
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001700 *
1701 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1702 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1703 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1704 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1705 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1706 * only in that case.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001707 *
1708 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1709 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1710 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1711 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1712 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1713 * the PS mode of connected stations.
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001714 *
1715 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1716 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1717 * software.
Eliad Peller885bd8e2012-02-02 17:44:55 +02001718 *
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001719 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1720 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1721 * active interfaces.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001722 *
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001723 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1724 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1725 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1726 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001727 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1728 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1729 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1730 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1731 * supported cipher suites.
1732 *
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001733 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
1734 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
1735 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
1736 * control for more details.
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001737 *
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001738 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
1739 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
1740 *
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001741 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
1742 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
1743 * is supported.
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001744 *
1745 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
1746 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001747 *
Johannes Berg919be622013-10-14 10:05:16 +02001748 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
1749 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
1750 * using aggregation for such frames.)
1751 *
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001752 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
1753 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
1754 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
1755 * CSA frame.
Luciano Coelho5d52ee82014-02-27 14:33:47 +02001756 *
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001757 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
1758 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
1759 *
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001760 * @IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
1761 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001762 */
1763enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
Johannes Bergaf65cd962009-11-17 18:18:36 +01001764 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL = 1<<0,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001765 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS = 1<<1,
1766 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING = 1<<2,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001767 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_SLOT_INCAPABLE = 1<<3,
1768 IEEE80211_HW_2GHZ_SHORT_PREAMBLE_INCAPABLE = 1<<4,
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001769 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC = 1<<5,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001770 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM = 1<<6,
Emmanuel Grumbachc65dd142012-12-12 10:12:24 +02001771 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7fee5372009-01-30 11:13:06 +01001772 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT = 1<<8,
1773 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION = 1<<9,
1774 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS = 1<<10,
1775 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK = 1<<11,
1776 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS = 1<<12,
1777 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE = 1<<13,
Johannes Berg4b6f1dd2012-04-03 14:35:57 +02001778 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF = 1<<14,
Ben Greeare27513f2014-10-22 12:23:03 -07001779 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF = 1<<15,
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01001780 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL = 1<<16,
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01001781 /* free slots */
Vivek Natarajan375177b2010-02-09 14:50:28 +05301782 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS = 1<<18,
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02001783 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR = 1<<19,
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001784 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL = 1<<20,
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02001785 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK = 1<<21,
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02001786 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS = 1<<22,
Arik Nemtsovedf6b782011-08-30 09:32:38 +03001787 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW = 1<<23,
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02001788 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE = 1<<24,
Johannes Berg6d711172012-06-19 17:19:44 +02001789 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF = 1<<25,
Johannes Bergef429da2013-02-05 17:48:40 +01001790 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY = 1<<26,
Felix Fietkau2dfca312013-08-20 19:43:54 +02001791 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES = 1<<27,
Arik Nemtsov7578d572013-09-01 17:15:51 +03001792 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA = 1<<28,
Ido Yarivc70f59a2014-07-29 15:39:14 +03001793 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS = 1<<29,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001794 IEEE80211_SINGLE_HW_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS = 1<<30,
Johannes Berg1bc08262007-09-18 17:29:15 -04001795};
1796
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001797/**
1798 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001799 *
1800 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
1801 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
1802 *
1803 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
1804 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
1805 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01001806 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
1807 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001808 *
1809 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
1810 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001811 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
1812 * along with this structure.
1813 *
1814 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
1815 *
1816 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
1817 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
1818 *
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001819 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
1820 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001821 *
Bruno Randolf566bfe52008-05-08 19:15:40 +02001822 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001823 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001824 *
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001825 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02001826 * that HW supports
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001827 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001828 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
Johannes Berge100bb62008-04-30 18:51:21 +02001829 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
1830 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
1831 *
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001832 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
1833 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
1834 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001835 *
1836 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1837 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001838 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1839 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001840 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
1841 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02001842 *
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001843 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
1844 * can handle.
1845 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
1846 * the hw can report back.
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001847 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04001848 *
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001849 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
1850 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
1851 * aggregation.
1852 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
1853 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
1854 * it shouldn't be set.
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001855 *
1856 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
1857 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit, used by the peer as a
1858 * hint to size its reorder buffer.
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001859 *
1860 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
1861 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001862 *
1863 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
1864 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
1865 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_* values, only
1866 * adding _BW is supported today.
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001867 *
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001868 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
1869 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
1870 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_* values.
1871 *
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001872 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
1873 * from this HW. Note only HW checksum features are currently
1874 * compatible with mac80211. Other feature bits will be rejected.
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001875 *
1876 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
1877 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
1878 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
1879 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
1880 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
1881 * neither enabled.
1882 *
1883 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
1884 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
1885 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001886 *
1887 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
1888 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
1889 * supported by HW.
Johannes Berg7ac1bd62007-09-14 11:10:25 -04001890 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001891struct ieee80211_hw {
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001892 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001893 struct wiphy *wiphy;
Johannes Berg830f9032007-10-28 14:51:05 +01001894 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001895 void *priv;
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001896 u32 flags;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001897 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
Felix Fietkau70dabeb2013-12-14 13:54:53 +01001898 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01001899 int vif_data_size;
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02001900 int sta_data_size;
Michal Kaziord01a1e62012-06-26 14:37:16 +02001901 int chanctx_data_size;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001902 u16 queues;
Tomas Winklerea95bba2008-07-18 13:53:00 +08001903 u16 max_listen_interval;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001904 s8 max_signal;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001905 u8 max_rates;
Helmut Schaa78be49e2010-10-02 11:31:55 +02001906 u8 max_report_rates;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02001907 u8 max_rate_tries;
Luciano Coelhodf6ba5d2011-01-12 15:26:30 +02001908 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg5dd36bc2011-01-18 13:52:23 +01001909 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02001910 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
Johannes Bergac55d2f2012-05-10 09:09:10 +02001911 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
Johannes Berg51648922012-11-22 23:00:18 +01001912 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
Arik Nemtsov72d78722012-05-10 16:18:26 +03001913 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
Alexander Bondar219c3862013-01-22 16:52:23 +02001914 u8 uapsd_queues;
1915 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
Max Stepanov2475b1cc2013-03-24 14:23:27 +02001916 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
1917 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001918};
1919
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001920/**
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02001921 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
1922 *
1923 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
1924 * @req: cfg80211 request.
1925 */
1926struct ieee80211_scan_request {
1927 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
1928
1929 /* Keep last */
1930 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
1931};
1932
1933/**
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02001934 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
1935 *
1936 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
1937 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
1938 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
1939 * @status: channel-switch response status
1940 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
1941 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
1942 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
1943 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
1944 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
1945 */
1946struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
1947 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1948 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
1949 u8 action_code;
1950 u32 status;
1951 u32 timestamp;
1952 u16 switch_time;
1953 u16 switch_timeout;
1954 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
1955 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
1956};
1957
1958/**
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001959 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
1960 *
1961 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
1962 *
1963 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
1964 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
1965 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
1966 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
1967 * is already used internally by mac80211.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01001968 *
1969 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
Luis R. Rodriguez9a953712009-01-22 15:05:53 -08001970 */
1971struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
1972
1973/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001974 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
1975 *
1976 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
1977 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
1978 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001979static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
1980{
1981 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
1982}
1983
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001984/**
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04001985 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04001986 *
1987 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
1988 * @addr: the address to set
1989 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07001990static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 *addr)
1991{
1992 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
1993}
1994
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001995static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
1996ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02001997 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02001998{
Larry Fingeraa331df2012-04-06 16:35:53 -05001999 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002000 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002001 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002002}
2003
2004static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2005ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002006 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002007{
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002008 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002009 return NULL;
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02002010 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002011}
2012
2013static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2014ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Felix Fietkau870abdf2008-10-05 18:04:24 +02002015 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002016{
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002017 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002018 return NULL;
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02002019 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
Johannes Berg2e92e6f2008-05-15 12:55:27 +02002020}
2021
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002022/**
Johannes Berg6096de72011-11-04 11:18:10 +01002023 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2024 * @hw: the hardware
2025 * @skb: the skb
2026 *
2027 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2028 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2029 */
2030void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2031
2032/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002033 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002034 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002035 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2036 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2037 *
2038 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2039 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002040 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2041 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2042 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002043 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2044 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2045 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002046 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2047 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2048 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2049 *
2050 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2051 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2052 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2053 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2054 *
Johannes Bergfa7e1fb2015-01-22 18:44:19 +01002055 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2056 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2057 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2058 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2059 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002060 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2061 *
2062 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2063 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2064 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2065 * based on the receive flags.
2066 *
2067 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2068 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2069 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2070 * keys.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002071 *
2072 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2073 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2074 * handler.
2075 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
Lucas De Marchi25985ed2011-03-30 22:57:33 -03002076 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002077 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2078 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002079 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002080 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002081 *
2082 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2083 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2084 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002085 */
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04002086
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002087/**
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002088 * DOC: Powersave support
2089 *
2090 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2091 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002092 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2093 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2094 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2095 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2096 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2097 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2098 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2099 * it finds traffic directed to it.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002100 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002101 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2102 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2103 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002104 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2105 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002106 *
2107 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2108 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2109 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002110 *
2111 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2112 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2113 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2114 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002115 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2116 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002117 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002118 *
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002119 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2120 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2121 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2122 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2123 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2124 * periods.
2125 *
Bob Copeland2738bd62010-08-21 16:39:01 -04002126 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002127 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2128 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2129 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2130 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2131 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2132 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2133 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2134 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2135 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2136 *
2137 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
Johannes Berg848955c2014-11-11 12:48:42 +01002138 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002139 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
Kalle Valoc99445b2010-01-14 13:09:21 +02002140 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2141 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2142 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2143 *
2144 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2145 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
Johannes Berg4be8c382009-01-07 18:28:20 +01002146 */
2147
2148/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002149 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2150 *
2151 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
Justin P. Mattock42b2aa82011-11-28 20:31:00 -08002152 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002153 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2154 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2155 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2156 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2157 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2158 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01002159 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2160 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
Johannes Berg955394c2009-04-16 17:04:25 +02002161 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2162 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2163 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2164 *
2165 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2166 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2167 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2168 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2169 *
2170 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2171 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2172 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2173 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2174 * - a list of information element IDs
2175 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2176 *
2177 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2178 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2179 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2180 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2181 * vendor information elements.
2182 *
2183 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2184 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2185 *
2186 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2187 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2188 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2189 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2190 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2191 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2192 *
2193 *
2194 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2195 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2196 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2197 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2198 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2199 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2200 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2201 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2202 *
2203 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2204 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2205 * signal strength threshold checking.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02002206 */
2207
2208/**
Johannes Berg0f782312009-12-01 13:37:02 +01002209 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2210 *
2211 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2212 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2213 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2214 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2215 *
2216 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2217 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2218 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2219 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2220 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2221 * hardware flags.
2222 *
2223 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2224 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2225 * turned off otherwise.
2226 *
2227 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2228 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2229 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2230 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2231 */
2232
2233/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002234 * DOC: Frame filtering
2235 *
2236 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2237 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2238 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2239 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2240 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2241 *
2242 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2243 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2244 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2245 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002246 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2247 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2248 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2249 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2250 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2251 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2252 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002253 *
2254 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2255 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2256 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2257 * or dropped.
2258 *
Michael Bueschd0f5afb2008-02-12 20:12:45 +01002259 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2260 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2261 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2262 * the flag, but not clear it.
2263 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2264 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2265 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2266 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2267 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2268 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2269 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2270 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002271 */
2272
2273/**
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002274 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2275 *
2276 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2277 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2278 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2279 *
2280 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2281 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2282 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2283 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2284 * the driver code.
2285 *
2286 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2287 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2288 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2289 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2290 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2291 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2292 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2293 *
2294 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2295 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2296 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2297 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2298 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2299 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2300 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2301 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2302 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2303 * @sta_notify callback.
2304 *
2305 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2306 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2307 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2308 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2309 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2310 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2311 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002312 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002313 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2314 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2315 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2316 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2317 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2318 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2319 *
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002320 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2321 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2322 *
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002323 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2324 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2325 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2326 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2327 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2328 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2329 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2330 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2331 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2332 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2333 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2334 *
2335 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2336 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2337 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2338 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2339 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2340 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2341 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2342 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2343 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2344 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002345 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002346 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2347 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2348 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2349 *
2350 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2351 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2352 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2353 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2354 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002355 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002356 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2357 *
2358 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2359 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2360 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2361 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002362 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
Johannes Bergb77cf4f2014-01-09 00:00:38 +01002363 *
2364 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2365 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2366 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2367 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
Johannes Berg4b801bc2011-09-29 16:04:40 +02002368 */
2369
2370/**
Johannes Berg3a25a8c2012-04-03 16:28:50 +02002371 * DOC: HW queue control
2372 *
2373 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2374 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2375 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2376 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2377 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2378 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2379 *
2380 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2381 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2382 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2383 *
2384 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2385 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2386 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2387 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2388 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2389 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2390 * the hardware queue.
2391 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2392 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2393 *
2394 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2395 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2396 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2397 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2398 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2399 *
2400 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2401 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2402 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2403 * off-channel queue: 9
2404 *
2405 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2406 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2407 *
2408 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2409 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2410 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2411 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2412 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2413 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2414 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2415 *
2416 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2417 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2418 *
2419 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2420 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2421 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2422 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2423 */
2424
2425/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002426 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2427 *
2428 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2429 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2430 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2431 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2432 *
2433 * @FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS: promiscuous mode within your BSS,
2434 * think of the BSS as your network segment and then this corresponds
2435 * to the regular ethernet device promiscuous mode.
2436 *
2437 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2438 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2439 * multicast address.
2440 *
2441 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2442 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2443 *
2444 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2445 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2446 *
2447 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2448 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2449 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2450 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2451 * honour this flag if possible.
2452 *
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002453 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll), if PROMISC_IN_BSS
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002454 * is not set then only those addressed to this station.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002455 *
2456 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002457 *
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002458 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames, if PROMISC_IN_BSS is not set then only
2459 * those addressed to this station.
2460 *
2461 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002462 */
2463enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2464 FIF_PROMISC_IN_BSS = 1<<0,
2465 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2466 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2467 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2468 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2469 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2470 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
Igor Perminove3b90ca2009-08-04 16:48:51 +04002471 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
Johannes Berg7be50862010-10-13 12:06:24 +02002472 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002473};
2474
2475/**
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002476 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2477 *
2478 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2479 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002480 *
2481 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2482 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02002483 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
Johannes Berg827d42c2009-11-22 12:28:41 +01002484 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2485 *
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002486 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2487 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2488 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002489 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002490 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2491 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2492 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2493 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2494 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2495 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2496 * session is gone and removes the station.
2497 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2498 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2499 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2500 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002501 */
2502enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2503 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2504 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002505 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
Johannes Berg18b559d2012-07-18 13:51:25 +02002506 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2507 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2508 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
Johannes Bergb1720232009-03-23 17:28:39 +01002509 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002510};
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002511
2512/**
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002513 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2514 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002515 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2516 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002517 */
2518enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2519 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002520 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002521};
2522
2523/**
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002524 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2525 *
2526 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
Johannes Berge1a0c6b2013-02-07 11:47:44 +01002527 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2528 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2529 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002530 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002531 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2532 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2533 * the peer.
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002534 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2535 * by the peer
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002536 */
2537enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2538 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2539 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
Antonio Quartullie687f612012-08-12 18:24:55 +02002540 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
Johannes Berg0af83d32012-12-27 18:55:36 +01002541 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002542};
2543
2544/**
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02002545 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2546 *
2547 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2548 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2549 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2550 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2551 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2552 *
2553 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2554 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2555 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2556 */
2557enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2558 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2559 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2560};
2561
2562/**
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02002563 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2564 *
2565 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2566 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2567 *
2568 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2569 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2570 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2571 * of wowlan configuration)
2572 */
2573enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2574 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2575 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2576};
2577
2578/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002579 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2580 *
2581 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2582 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2583 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2584 *
2585 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2586 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2587 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
Johannes Bergeefce912008-05-17 00:57:13 +02002588 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002589 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
Johannes Berg11127e92011-11-16 16:02:47 +01002590 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002591 *
2592 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2593 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2594 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2595 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2596 * or zero.
2597 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2598 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2599 * is added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002600 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002601 *
2602 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
2603 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
2604 * it must turn off frame reception.)
2605 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04002606 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
2607 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002608 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002609 *
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002610 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
2611 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
2612 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
2613 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
2614 * reconfigured at resume time.
Johannes Berg2b4562d2011-07-02 00:02:01 +02002615 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
2616 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
2617 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
2618 * must return 1 from this function.
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02002619 *
2620 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
2621 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
2622 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
2623 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
2624 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
2625 *
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02002626 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
2627 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
2628 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
2629 * in suspend().
2630 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002631 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
Bob Copelande37d4df2008-10-20 21:20:27 -04002632 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002633 * and @stop must be implemented.
2634 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
2635 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
2636 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
2637 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
2638 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002639 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002640 *
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02002641 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
2642 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
2643 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
2644 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
2645 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
2646 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002647 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
2648 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
2649 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
2650 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
2651 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
2652 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
2653 * MAC address of the device going away.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002654 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002655 *
2656 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
2657 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002658 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002659 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002660 *
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002661 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
2662 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
2663 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
2664 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
2665 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002666 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
2667 * can sleep.
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01002668 *
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02002669 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
2670 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
2671 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
2672 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002673 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
2674 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002675 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002676 *
Luis R. Rodriguez546c80c92008-08-14 11:43:20 -07002677 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02002678 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002679 *
2680 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002681 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
2682 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01002683 * is enabled.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002684 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002685 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002686 *
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002687 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
2688 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
2689 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
Kalle Valoeb807fb2010-01-24 14:55:12 +02002690 * The callback must be atomic.
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02002691 *
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02002692 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
2693 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
2694 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
2695 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
2696 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
2697 *
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03002698 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
2699 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
2700 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
2701 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002702 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01002703 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
Kalle Valo9050bdd2009-03-22 21:57:21 +02002704 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
2705 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
Johannes Bergde95a542009-04-01 11:58:36 +02002706 * that power save is disabled.
2707 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
2708 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
2709 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
2710 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
2711 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
2712 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
2713 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002714 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002715 *
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03002716 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
2717 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
2718 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
2719 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
2720 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
2721 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
2722 * The callback can sleep.
2723 *
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002724 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
2725 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
2726 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
2727 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
2728 *
2729 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01002730 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03002731 *
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002732 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
2733 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02002734 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
2735 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
2736 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002737 *
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002738 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
2739 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
2740 * this notification.
2741 * The callback can sleep.
Michael Buesch80e775b2009-02-20 15:37:03 +01002742 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002743 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
2744 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002745 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002746 *
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01002747 * @get_tkip_seq: If your device implements TKIP encryption in hardware this
2748 * callback should be provided to read the TKIP transmit IVs (both IV32
2749 * and IV16) for the given key from hardware.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002750 * The callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002751 *
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02002752 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
2753 * if the device does fragmentation by itself; if this callback is
2754 * implemented then the stack will not do fragmentation.
2755 * The callback can sleep.
2756 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002757 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002758 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002759 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002760 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
2761 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
2762 *
2763 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002764 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
2765 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
2766 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
2767 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2768 * This callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002769 *
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05302770 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
2771 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
2772 * and @sta_remove_debugfs should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
2773 * conditional. This callback can sleep.
2774 *
2775 * @sta_remove_debugfs: Remove the debugfs files which were added using
2776 * @sta_add_debugfs. This callback can sleep.
2777 *
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01002778 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02002779 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
2780 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
2781 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
Christian Lamparter4571d3b2008-11-30 00:48:41 +01002782 *
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002783 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
2784 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
2785 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
2786 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01002787 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
2788 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
2789 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
2790 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
2791 * The callback can sleep.
2792 *
2793 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
2794 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
2795 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
2796 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
2797 * in @sta_state.
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01002798 * The callback can sleep.
2799 *
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002800 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
2801 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
2802 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
2803 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
2804 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
2805 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
2806 * Must be atomic.
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01002807 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
2808 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
2809 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02002810 *
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01002811 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
2812 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
2813 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
2814 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
2815 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
2816 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
2817 * The callback can sleep.
2818 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002819 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
Johannes Bergfe3fa822008-09-08 11:05:09 +02002820 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002821 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002822 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002823 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002824 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002825 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002826 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002827 * The callback can sleep.
Alina Friedrichsen3b5d6652009-01-24 07:09:59 +01002828 *
2829 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
Johannes Bergad24b0d2013-07-05 11:53:28 +02002830 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
Alina Friedrichsen7b08b3b2009-02-05 17:58:34 +01002831 * required function.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002832 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002833 *
2834 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
2835 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
2836 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
2837 * TSF synchronization.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002838 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002839 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04002840 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
2841 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
2842 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002843 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002844 * The callback can sleep.
Ron Rindjunskyd3c990f2007-11-26 16:14:34 +02002845 *
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02002846 * @ampdu_action: Perform a certain A-MPDU action
2847 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
2848 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
2849 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action. Starting sequence number (@ssn)
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002850 * is the first frame we expect to perform the action on. Notice
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02002851 * that TX/RX_STOP can pass NULL for this parameter.
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01002852 * The @buf_size parameter is only valid when the action is set to
2853 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL and indicates the peer's reorder
Johannes Berg5312c3f2011-04-01 13:52:34 +02002854 * buffer size (number of subframes) for this session -- the driver
2855 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than this
2856 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
2857 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
2858 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
2859 * - TX: 1.....7
2860 * - RX: 2....7 (lost frame #1)
2861 * - TX: 8..1...
2862 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
2863 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
2864 * - TX: 1 or 18 or 81
2865 * Even "189" would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
2866 *
Bob Copeland6dd1bf32009-01-08 21:00:34 -05002867 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
Johannes Berg85ad1812010-06-10 10:21:49 +02002868 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002869 *
Randy Dunlap4e8998f2010-05-21 11:28:33 -07002870 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
2871 *
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02002872 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
2873 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
2874 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
Kalle Valoe1781ed2009-12-23 13:15:47 +01002875 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02002876 *
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002877 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
2878 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02002879 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
2880 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
2881 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
Lukáš Turek310bc672009-12-21 22:50:48 +01002882 *
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03002883 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
2884 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07002885 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berga80f7c02009-12-23 13:15:32 +01002886 *
2887 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002888 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
2889 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
2890 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
2891 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02002892 * Note that vif can be NULL.
Johannes Berg39ecc012013-02-13 12:11:00 +01002893 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02002894 *
2895 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
2896 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
2897 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
2898 * completion of the channel switch.
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04002899 *
Bruno Randolf79b1c462010-11-24 14:34:41 +09002900 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
2901 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
2902 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
2903 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
2904 *
2905 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002906 *
2907 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
2908 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
2909 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
2910 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
2911 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
2912 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002913 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
Johannes Berg196ac1c2012-06-05 14:28:40 +02002914 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
2915 * must be accepted in this case.
2916 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg4976b4e2011-01-04 13:02:32 +01002917 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
2918 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05002919 *
2920 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
2921 *
2922 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05302923 *
2924 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
2925 * queues before entering power save.
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05302926 *
2927 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
2928 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
2929 * The callback can sleep.
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02002930 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
2931 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
2932 * The callback can sleep.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002933 *
2934 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
2935 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
2936 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
2937 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
Masanari Iidae2278672014-02-18 22:54:36 +09002938 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002939 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
2940 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
2941 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
2942 * more-data bit must always be set.
2943 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
2944 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
Johannes Bergdeeaee12011-09-29 16:04:35 +02002945 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
2946 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
2947 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2948 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
2949 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
2950 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002951 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
2952 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
2953 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
Johannes Berg47086fc2011-09-29 16:04:33 +02002954 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
2955 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002956 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002957 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02002958 * This callback must be atomic.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002959 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
2960 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
2961 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
Johannes Berg02f2f1a2012-02-27 12:18:30 +01002962 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002963 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
2964 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
2965 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
2966 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02002967 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01002968 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02002969 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
2970 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
2971 * This callback must be atomic.
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07002972 *
2973 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
2974 *
2975 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
2976 *
2977 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
2978 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
2979 *
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02002980 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
2981 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
2982 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
2983 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
2984 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
2985 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
2986 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
2987 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
2988 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
2989 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
2990 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
2991 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02002992 *
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03002993 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
2994 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
2995 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
2996 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
2997 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
2998 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
2999 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3000 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3001 *
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003002 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3003 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3004 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3005 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3006 * channel context with different settings
3007 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3008 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3009 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3010 * unbound from vif.
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003011 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3012 * another, as specified in the list of
3013 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3014 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3015 *
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003016 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3017 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3018 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3019 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3020 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3021 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3022 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003023 *
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003024 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3025 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3026 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3027 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3028 * This callback may sleep.
Johannes Berg8f21b0a2013-01-11 00:28:01 +01003029 *
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003030 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3031 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3032 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003033 *
3034 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3035 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3036 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003037 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003038 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3039 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003040 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003041 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003042 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3043 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003044 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3045 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3046 * gets a CSA or an userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3047 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003048 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3049 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3050 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003051 *
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003052 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3053 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3054 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3055 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003056 *
3057 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3058 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3059 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003060 *
3061 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3062 * and hardware limits.
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003063 *
3064 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3065 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3066 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3067 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3068 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3069 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3070 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3071 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3072 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003073 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3074 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3075 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3076 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3077 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3078 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3079 * the function call.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003080 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003081struct ieee80211_ops {
Thomas Huehn36323f82012-07-23 21:33:42 +02003082 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3083 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3084 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003085 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003086 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003087#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3088 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3089 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Johannes Berg6d525632012-04-04 15:05:25 +02003090 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
Johannes Bergeecc4802011-05-04 15:37:29 +02003091#endif
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003092 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003093 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg34d4bc42010-08-27 12:35:58 +02003094 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3095 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02003096 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003097 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003098 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berge8975582008-10-09 12:18:51 +02003099 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
Johannes Berg471b3ef2007-12-28 14:32:58 +01003100 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3101 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3102 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3103 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergb2abb6e2011-07-19 10:39:53 +02003104
Johannes Berg10416382012-10-19 15:44:42 +02003105 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3106 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3107
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003108 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Jiri Pirko22bedad32010-04-01 21:22:57 +00003109 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
Johannes Berg4150c572007-09-17 01:29:23 -04003110 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3111 unsigned int changed_flags,
3112 unsigned int *total_flags,
Johannes Berg3ac64be2009-08-17 16:16:53 +02003113 u64 multicast);
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003114 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3115 bool set);
Johannes Bergea49c352007-09-18 17:29:21 -04003116 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
Johannes Bergdc822b52008-12-29 12:55:09 +01003117 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
Johannes Berg11a843b2007-08-28 17:01:55 -04003118 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
Emmanuel Grumbach9ae4fda2008-03-20 15:06:42 +02003119 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergb3fbdcf2010-01-21 11:40:47 +01003120 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3121 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3122 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3123 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02003124 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3125 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3126 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
Yoni Divinskyde5fad82012-05-30 11:36:39 +03003127 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3128 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
Johannes Berga060bbf2010-04-27 11:59:34 +02003129 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
David Spinadelc56ef672014-02-05 15:21:13 +02003130 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
Eliad Pellerb8564392011-06-13 12:47:30 +03003131 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3132 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003133 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3134 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3135 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
David Spinadel633e2712014-02-06 16:15:23 +02003136 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
Johannes Berg37e33082014-02-17 10:48:17 +01003137 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03003138 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003139 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3140 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3141 const u8 *mac_addr);
3142 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3143 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003144 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3145 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
Johannes Berg62da92f2007-12-19 02:03:31 +01003146 void (*get_tkip_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 hw_key_idx,
3147 u32 *iv32, u16 *iv16);
Arik Nemtsovf23a4782010-11-08 11:51:06 +02003148 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003149 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
Johannes Berg34e89502010-02-03 13:59:58 +01003150 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3151 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3152 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3153 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Sujith Manoharan77d2ece2012-11-20 08:46:02 +05303154#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3155 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3156 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3157 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3158 struct dentry *dir);
3159 void (*sta_remove_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3160 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3161 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3162 struct dentry *dir);
3163#endif
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01003164 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02003165 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Bergf09603a2012-01-20 13:55:21 +01003166 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3167 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3168 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3169 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
Johannes Berg6a9d1b92013-12-04 22:39:17 +01003170 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3171 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3172 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg8f727ef2012-03-30 08:43:32 +02003173 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3174 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3175 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3176 u32 changed);
Johannes Bergf815e2b2014-11-19 00:10:42 +01003177 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3178 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3179 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Johannes Berg2b9a7e12014-11-17 11:35:23 +01003180 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3181 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3182 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3183 struct station_info *sinfo);
Eliad Peller8a3a3c82011-10-02 10:15:52 +02003184 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga3304b02012-03-28 11:04:24 +02003185 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003186 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
Eliad Peller37a41b42011-09-21 14:06:11 +03003187 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3188 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3189 u64 tsf);
3190 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003191 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003192 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01003193 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Ron Rindjunsky1b7d03a2007-12-25 17:00:31 +02003194 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action,
Johannes Berg0b01f032011-01-18 13:51:05 +01003195 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid, u16 *ssn,
3196 u8 buf_size);
Holger Schurig12897232010-04-19 10:23:57 +02003197 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3198 struct survey_info *survey);
Johannes Berg1f87f7d2009-06-02 13:01:41 +02003199 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Lorenzo Bianconia4bcaf52014-09-04 23:57:41 +02003200 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003201#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
David Spinadel52981cd2013-07-31 18:06:22 +03003202 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3203 void *data, int len);
Wey-Yi Guy71063f02011-05-20 09:05:54 -07003204 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3205 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3206 void *data, int len);
Johannes Bergaff89a92009-07-01 21:26:51 +02003207#endif
Emmanuel Grumbach77be2c52014-03-27 11:30:29 +02003208 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3209 u32 queues, bool drop);
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003210 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Luciano Coelho0f791eb42014-10-08 09:48:40 +03003211 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02003212 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Bruno Randolf15d96752010-11-10 12:50:56 +09003213 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3214 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003215
3216 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Eliad Peller49884562012-11-19 17:05:09 +02003217 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003218 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
Ilan Peerd339d5c2013-02-12 09:34:13 +02003219 int duration,
3220 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01003221 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
John W. Linville38c09152011-03-07 16:19:18 -05003222 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3223 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3224 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
Vivek Natarajane8306f92011-04-06 11:41:10 +05303225 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
Sujith Manoharanbdbfd6b2011-04-27 16:56:51 +05303226 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3227 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
Emmanuel Grumbacha8182922015-03-16 23:23:34 +02003228 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3229 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3230 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003231
Johannes Berg40b96402011-09-29 16:04:38 +02003232 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3233 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3234 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3235 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3236 bool more_data);
Johannes Berg4049e092011-09-29 16:04:32 +02003237 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3238 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3239 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3240 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3241 bool more_data);
Ben Greeare3521142012-04-23 12:50:31 -07003242
3243 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3244 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3245 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3246 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3247 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3248 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3249 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3250 u32 sset, u8 *data);
Johannes Berga1845fc2012-06-27 13:18:36 +02003251
3252 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3253 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003254
Arik Nemtsovee10f2c2014-06-11 17:18:27 +03003255 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3256 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3257
Michal Kaziorc3645ea2012-06-26 14:37:17 +02003258 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3259 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3260 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3261 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3262 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3263 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3264 u32 changed);
3265 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3266 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3267 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3268 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3269 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
Luciano Coelho1a5f0c12014-05-23 14:33:12 +03003271 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3272 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3273 int n_vifs,
3274 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
Johannes Berg9214ad72012-11-06 19:18:13 +01003275
Eliad Pellercf2c92d2014-11-04 11:43:54 +02003276 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3277 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
Johannes Berga65240c2013-01-14 15:14:34 +01003278
3279#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3280 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3281 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3282 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3283#endif
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003284 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3285 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3286 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
Luciano Coelho6d027bc2014-10-08 09:48:37 +03003287 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3288 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3289 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003290
Luciano Coelhof1d65582014-10-08 09:48:38 +03003291 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3292 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3293
Johannes Berg55fff502013-08-19 18:48:41 +02003294 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3295 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02003296 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Felix Fietkau5b3dc422014-10-26 00:32:53 +02003297 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3298 int *dbm);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003299
3300 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3301 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3302 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3303 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003304 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
Arik Nemtsova7a6bdd2014-11-09 18:50:19 +02003305 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3306 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3307 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
Arik Nemtsov8a4d32f2014-11-09 18:50:20 +02003308 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3309 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3310 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003311};
3312
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003313/**
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003314 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3315 *
3316 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3317 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3318 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3319 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3320 * @priv_data_len.
3321 *
3322 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3323 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3324 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3325 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3326 *
3327 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3328 */
3329struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3330 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3331 const char *requested_name);
3332
3333/**
3334 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003335 *
3336 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3337 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3338 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3339 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3340 * @priv_data_len.
3341 *
3342 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3343 * @ops: callbacks for this device
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003344 *
3345 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003346 */
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003347static inline
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003348struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
Ben Greearad287572014-10-22 12:23:01 -07003349 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3350{
3351 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3352}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003353
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003354/**
3355 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3356 *
Johannes Bergdbbea672008-02-26 14:34:06 +01003357 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3358 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3359 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003360 *
3361 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003362 *
3363 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003364 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003365int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3366
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003367/**
3368 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3369 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3370 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3371 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3372 */
3373struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3374 int throughput;
3375 int blink_time;
3376};
3377
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003378/**
3379 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3380 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3381 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3382 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3383 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3384 */
3385enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3386 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3387 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3388 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3389};
3390
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003391#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Joe Perches10dd9b72013-07-31 17:31:37 -07003392char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3393char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3394char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3395char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3396char *__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3397 unsigned int flags,
3398 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3399 unsigned int blink_table_len);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003400#endif
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003401/**
3402 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3403 *
3404 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3405 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3406 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3407 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3408 *
3409 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003410 *
3411 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003412 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003413static inline char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3414{
3415#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3416 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3417#else
3418 return NULL;
3419#endif
3420}
3421
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003422/**
3423 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3424 *
3425 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3426 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3427 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3428 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3429 *
3430 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003431 *
3432 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003433 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003434static inline char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3435{
3436#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3437 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3438#else
3439 return NULL;
3440#endif
3441}
3442
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003443/**
3444 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3445 *
3446 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3447 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3448 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3449 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3450 *
3451 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003452 *
3453 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003454 */
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003455static inline char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3456{
3457#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3458 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3459#else
3460 return NULL;
3461#endif
3462}
3463
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003464/**
3465 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3466 *
3467 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3468 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3469 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3470 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3471 *
3472 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003473 *
3474 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
Ivo van Doorncdcb0062008-01-07 19:45:24 +01003475 */
3476static inline char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3477{
3478#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3479 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3480#else
3481 return NULL;
3482#endif
3483}
Michael Buesch47f0c502007-09-27 15:10:44 +02003484
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003485/**
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003486 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3487 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003488 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003489 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3490 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3491 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003492 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3493 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3494 *
3495 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003496 */
3497static inline char *
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003498ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003499 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3500 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3501{
3502#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
Johannes Berg67408c82010-11-30 08:59:23 +01003503 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
Johannes Berge1e54062010-11-30 08:58:45 +01003504 blink_table_len);
3505#else
3506 return NULL;
3507#endif
3508}
3509
3510/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003511 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3512 *
3513 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3514 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3515 *
3516 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3517 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003518void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3519
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003520/**
3521 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3522 *
3523 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3524 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003525 * before calling this function.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003526 *
3527 * @hw: the hardware to free
3528 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003529void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3530
Johannes Bergf2753dd2009-04-14 10:09:24 +02003531/**
3532 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
3533 *
3534 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
3535 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
3536 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
3537 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
3538 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
3539 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
3540 *
3541 * @hw: the hardware to restart
3542 */
3543void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3544
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003545/**
3546 * ieee80211_napi_add - initialize mac80211 NAPI context
3547 * @hw: the hardware to initialize the NAPI context on
3548 * @napi: the NAPI context to initialize
3549 * @napi_dev: dummy NAPI netdevice, here to not waste the space if the
3550 * driver doesn't use NAPI
3551 * @poll: poll function
3552 * @weight: default weight
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003553 *
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003554 * See also netif_napi_add().
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003555 */
Johannes Berg06d181a2014-02-04 20:51:09 +01003556void ieee80211_napi_add(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct napi_struct *napi,
3557 struct net_device *napi_dev,
3558 int (*poll)(struct napi_struct *, int),
3559 int weight);
John W. Linville4e6cbfd2010-07-29 16:14:13 -04003560
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003561/**
3562 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
3563 *
3564 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
Zhu Yie3cf8b32010-03-29 17:35:07 +08003565 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
3566 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
3567 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
3568 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003569 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003570 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003571 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
3572 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003573 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3574 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003575 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003576 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Bergd20ef632009-10-11 15:10:40 +02003577 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003578 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3579 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003580 */
John W. Linville103bf9f2009-08-20 16:34:15 -04003581void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003582
3583/**
3584 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
3585 *
3586 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003587 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3588 *
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003589 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003590 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
3591 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003592 *
3593 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3594 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003595 */
Johannes Bergf1d58c22009-06-17 13:13:00 +02003596void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003597
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003598/**
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003599 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
3600 *
3601 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
3602 * (internally disables bottom halves).
3603 *
3604 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003605 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3606 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003607 *
3608 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
3609 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
3610 */
3611static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3612 struct sk_buff *skb)
3613{
3614 local_bh_disable();
3615 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
3616 local_bh_enable();
3617}
3618
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003619/**
3620 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
3621 *
3622 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
3623 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
3624 * entering/leaving PS mode.
3625 *
3626 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
3627 *
3628 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
3629 * each other.
3630 *
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003631 * @sta: currently connected sta
3632 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003633 *
3634 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003635 */
3636int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
3637
3638/**
3639 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
3640 * (in process context)
3641 *
3642 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
3643 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
3644 * applies.
3645 *
3646 * @sta: currently connected sta
3647 * @start: start or stop PS
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003648 *
3649 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
Arik Nemtsovd057e5a2011-01-31 22:29:13 +02003650 */
3651static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3652 bool start)
3653{
3654 int ret;
3655
3656 local_bh_disable();
3657 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
3658 local_bh_enable();
3659
3660 return ret;
3661}
3662
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003663/*
3664 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
3665 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
3666 */
Helmut Schaa7f2a5e22011-10-11 18:08:55 +02003667#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM 14
Gertjan van Wingerded24deb22009-12-04 23:46:54 +01003668
Kalle Valoe36e49f2009-10-13 20:33:13 +03003669/**
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003670 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
Randy Dunlapbdfbe802011-05-22 17:22:45 -07003671 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003672 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
3673 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003674 *
3675 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003676 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
3677 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003678 *
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003679 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
3680 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
3681 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
3682 * call! Beware of the locking!)
3683 *
3684 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
3685 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
3686 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
3687 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
3688 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
3689 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
3690 *
3691 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
3692 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
3693 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
3694 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
3695 * use this API.
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003696 */
Johannes Berg042ec452011-09-29 16:04:26 +02003697void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3698 u8 tid, bool buffered);
Felix Fietkaudcf55fb2011-04-17 17:45:00 +02003699
3700/**
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02003701 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
3702 *
3703 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
3704 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
3705 * rate selection table for the station entry.
3706 *
3707 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3708 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
3709 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
3710 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
3711 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
3712 */
3713void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3714 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3715 struct sk_buff *skb,
3716 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
3717 int max_rates);
3718
3719/**
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003720 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
3721 *
3722 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
3723 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
3724 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
3725 *
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003726 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
3727 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003728 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
Felix Fietkauf6b3d852013-05-03 10:01:03 +02003729 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
3730 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003731 *
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003732 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3733 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04003734 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003735void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003736 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003737
3738/**
Felix Fietkauf027c2a2014-11-19 20:08:13 +01003739 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
3740 *
3741 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
3742 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
3743 * specific skbs.
3744 *
3745 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
3746 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
3747 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
3748 *
3749 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3750 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
3751 * (NULL for multicast packets)
3752 * @info: tx status information
3753 */
3754void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3755 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3756 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
3757
3758/**
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003759 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
3760 *
3761 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
3762 *
3763 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3764 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
3765 * for a single hardware.
3766 *
3767 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3768 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
3769 */
3770static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3771 struct sk_buff *skb)
3772{
3773 local_bh_disable();
3774 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
3775 local_bh_enable();
3776}
3777
3778/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07003779 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003780 *
3781 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
3782 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
3783 *
Johannes Stezenbach20ed3162010-11-30 16:49:23 +01003784 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
3785 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003786 *
3787 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
3788 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
Johannes Berg2485f712008-02-25 16:27:41 +01003789 */
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003790void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003791 struct sk_buff *skb);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003792
3793/**
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003794 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
3795 *
3796 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
3797 * connected STA.
3798 *
3799 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
3800 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
3801 */
3802void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
3803
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003804#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
3805
Arik Nemtsov8178d382011-04-18 14:22:28 +03003806/**
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003807 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
3808 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
3809 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
Luciano Coelho8d77ec82014-05-15 20:32:08 +03003810 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
3811 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
3812 * should be ignored.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003813 */
3814struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
3815 u16 tim_offset;
3816 u16 tim_length;
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003817
3818 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003819};
3820
3821/**
3822 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
3823 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3824 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3825 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
3826 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
3827 *
3828 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
3829 * obtain the beacon template.
3830 *
3831 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
3832 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003833 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
3834 * applicable, the CSA count.
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003835 *
3836 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
3837 *
3838 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
3839 */
3840struct sk_buff *
3841ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3842 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3843 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
3844
3845/**
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003846 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
3847 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003848 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003849 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
3850 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3851 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
3852 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
3853 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
3854 *
3855 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003856 * obtain the beacon frame.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003857 *
3858 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3859 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
Andrei Otcheretianski6ec8c332014-05-09 14:11:49 +03003860 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
3861 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003862 *
3863 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003864 *
3865 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003866 */
3867struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3868 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3869 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
3870
3871/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003872 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
3873 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003874 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003875 *
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003876 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003877 *
3878 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003879 */
Johannes Bergeddcbb92009-10-29 08:30:35 +01003880static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3881 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
3882{
3883 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
3884}
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003885
3886/**
Andrei Otcheretianski1af586c2014-05-09 14:11:50 +03003887 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
3888 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3889 *
3890 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
3891 * This function is called implicitly when
3892 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
3893 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
3894 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
3895 *
3896 * Return: new csa counter value
3897 */
3898u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3899
3900/**
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003901 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
3902 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3903 *
3904 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003905 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003906 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
3907 */
3908void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3909
3910/**
Luciano Coelho66e01cf2014-01-13 19:43:00 +02003911 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
Simon Wunderlich73da7d52013-07-11 16:09:06 +02003912 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3913 *
3914 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
3915 */
3916bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3917
3918
3919/**
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003920 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
3921 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3922 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3923 *
3924 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3925 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
3926 *
3927 * Can only be called in AP mode.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003928 *
3929 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
Arik Nemtsov02945822011-11-10 11:28:57 +02003930 */
3931struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3932 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3933
3934/**
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003935 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
3936 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3937 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3938 *
3939 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
3940 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3941 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
3942 *
3943 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3944 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003945 *
3946 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003947 */
3948struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3949 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3950
3951/**
3952 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
3953 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
3954 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
3955 *
3956 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
3957 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
3958 * BSSID and address is used.
3959 *
3960 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
3961 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003962 *
3963 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo7044cc52010-01-05 20:16:19 +02003964 */
3965struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3966 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3967
3968/**
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003969 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
3970 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003971 * @src_addr: source MAC address
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003972 * @ssid: SSID buffer
3973 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003974 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003975 *
3976 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
3977 * hardware.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01003978 *
3979 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003980 */
3981struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berga344d672014-06-12 22:24:31 +02003982 const u8 *src_addr,
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003983 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
Johannes Bergb9a9ada2012-11-29 13:00:10 +01003984 size_t tailroom);
Kalle Valo05e54ea2010-01-05 20:16:38 +02003985
3986/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003987 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
3988 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01003989 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003990 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
3991 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02003992 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07003993 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
3994 *
3995 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
3996 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
3997 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
3998 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
3999 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004000void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004001 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004002 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004003 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4004
4005/**
4006 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4007 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004008 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004009 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004010 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004011 *
4012 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4013 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4014 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004015 *
4016 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004017 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004018__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4019 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004020 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004021
4022/**
4023 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4024 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004025 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004026 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4027 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004028 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004029 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4030 *
4031 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4032 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4033 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4034 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4035 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004036void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4037 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004038 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004039 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004040 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4041
4042/**
4043 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4044 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004045 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004046 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004047 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004048 *
4049 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4050 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4051 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004052 *
4053 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004054 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004055__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4056 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004057 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004058 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004059
4060/**
4061 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4062 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004063 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Bergd13e1412012-06-09 10:31:09 +02004064 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004065 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004066 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004067 *
4068 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4069 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004070 *
4071 * Return: The duration.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004072 */
Johannes Berg32bfd352007-12-19 01:31:26 +01004073__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4074 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Michal Kazior4ee73f32012-04-11 08:47:56 +02004075 enum ieee80211_band band,
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004076 size_t frame_len,
Johannes Berg8318d782008-01-24 19:38:38 +01004077 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004078
4079/**
4080 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4081 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004082 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004083 *
4084 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4085 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4086 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4087 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004088 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4089 *
4090 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4091 * frames are available.
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004092 *
4093 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4094 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4095 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4096 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4097 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4098 * use common code for all beacons.
4099 */
4100struct sk_buff *
Johannes Berge039fa42008-05-15 12:55:29 +02004101ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004102
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004103/**
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004104 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4105 *
4106 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4107 *
4108 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4109 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4110 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4111 */
4112void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4113 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4114
4115/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004116 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004117 *
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004118 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4119 * from the given packet.
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004120 *
4121 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004122 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4123 * with this P1K
4124 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004125 */
Johannes Berg42d98792011-07-07 18:58:01 +02004126static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4127 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4128{
4129 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4130 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4131 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4132
4133 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4134}
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004135
4136/**
Johannes Berg8bca5d82011-07-13 19:50:34 +02004137 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4138 *
4139 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4140 * and transmitter address.
4141 *
4142 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4143 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4144 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4145 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4146 */
4147void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4148 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4149
4150/**
Johannes Berg523b02e2011-07-07 22:28:01 +02004151 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4152 *
4153 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4154 * in the packet.
4155 *
4156 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4157 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4158 * encrypted with this key
4159 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4160 */
4161void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4162 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004163
4164/**
Assaf Krauss5d0d04e2012-08-01 15:12:48 +03004165 * ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2 - calculate the AES-CMAC sub keys
4166 *
4167 * This function computes the two AES-CMAC sub-keys, based on the
4168 * previously installed master key.
4169 *
4170 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4171 * @k1: a buffer to be filled with the 1st sub-key
4172 * @k2: a buffer to be filled with the 2nd sub-key
4173 */
4174void ieee80211_aes_cmac_calculate_k1_k2(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4175 u8 *k1, u8 *k2);
4176
4177/**
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004178 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
4179 *
4180 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
4181 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4182 * reverse order than in packet)
4183 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4184 * reverse order than in packet)
Jouni Malinen8ade5382015-01-24 19:52:09 +02004185 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4186 * reverse order than in packet)
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004187 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
4188 * reverse order than in packet)
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004189 */
4190struct ieee80211_key_seq {
4191 union {
4192 struct {
4193 u32 iv32;
4194 u16 iv16;
4195 } tkip;
4196 struct {
4197 u8 pn[6];
4198 } ccmp;
4199 struct {
4200 u8 pn[6];
4201 } aes_cmac;
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004202 struct {
4203 u8 pn[6];
Jouni Malinen8ade5382015-01-24 19:52:09 +02004204 } aes_gmac;
4205 struct {
4206 u8 pn[6];
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004207 } gcmp;
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004208 };
4209};
4210
4211/**
4212 * ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq - get key TX sequence counter
4213 *
4214 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4215 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4216 *
4217 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current TX IV/PN
4218 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV generation is
4219 * offloaded to the device.
4220 *
4221 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4222 * can be done concurrently, for example when queues are stopped
4223 * and the stop has been synchronized.
4224 */
4225void ieee80211_get_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4226 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4227
4228/**
4229 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4230 *
4231 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004232 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg3ea542d2011-07-07 18:58:00 +02004233 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4234 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4235 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4236 *
4237 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4238 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4239 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4240 *
4241 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4242 * can be done concurrently.
4243 */
4244void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4245 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4246
4247/**
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004248 * ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq - set key TX sequence counter
4249 *
4250 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4251 * @seq: new sequence data
4252 *
4253 * This function allows a driver to set the current TX IV/PNs for the
4254 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and the
4255 * device may have transmitted frames using the PTK, e.g. replies to
4256 * ARP requests.
4257 *
4258 * Note that this function may only be called when no TX processing
4259 * can be done concurrently.
4260 */
4261void ieee80211_set_key_tx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4262 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4263
4264/**
4265 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4266 *
4267 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
Jouni Malinen00b9cfa2015-01-24 19:52:06 +02004268 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
Johannes Berg27b3eb92013-08-07 20:11:55 +02004269 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4270 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4271 * @seq: new sequence data
4272 *
4273 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4274 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4275 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4276 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4277 *
4278 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4279 * can be done concurrently.
4280 */
4281void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4282 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4283
4284/**
4285 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4286 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4287 *
4288 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4289 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4290 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4291 *
4292 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4293 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4294 */
4295void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4296
4297/**
4298 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4299 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4300 * @keyconf: new key data
4301 *
4302 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4303 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4304 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4305 *
4306 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4307 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4308 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4309 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4310 *
4311 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4312 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4313 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4314 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4315 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4316 * of the reconfiguration.
4317 *
4318 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4319 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4320 *
4321 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4322 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4323 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4324 * the key that's being replaced.
4325 */
4326struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4327ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4328 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4329
4330/**
Johannes Bergc68f4b82011-07-05 16:35:41 +02004331 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4332 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4333 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4334 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4335 * @gfp: allocation flags
4336 */
4337void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4338 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4339
Emmanuel Grumbach5d2cdcd2008-03-20 15:06:41 +02004340/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004341 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4342 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4343 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4344 *
4345 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4346 */
4347void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4348
4349/**
4350 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4351 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4352 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4353 *
4354 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4355 */
4356void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4357
4358/**
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004359 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4360 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4361 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4362 *
4363 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004364 *
4365 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
Tomas Winkler92ab8532008-07-24 21:02:04 +03004366 */
4367
4368int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4369
4370/**
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004371 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4372 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4373 *
4374 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4375 */
4376void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4377
4378/**
4379 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4380 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4381 *
4382 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4383 */
4384void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4385
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004386/**
4387 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4388 *
4389 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4390 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
Johannes Berg8789d452010-08-26 13:30:26 +02004391 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4392 * any context, including hardirq context.
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004393 *
4394 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004395 * @aborted: set to true if scan was aborted
Johannes Berg75a5f0c2007-09-18 17:29:20 -04004396 */
Johannes Berg2a519312009-02-10 21:25:55 +01004397void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool aborted);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07004398
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004399/**
Luciano Coelho79f460c2011-05-11 17:09:36 +03004400 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4401 *
4402 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4403 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4404 *
4405 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4406 */
4407void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4408
4409/**
4410 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4411 *
4412 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4413 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4414 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4415 * while associating, for instance.
4416 *
4417 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4418 */
4419void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4420
4421/**
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004422 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4423 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4424 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4425 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4426 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4427 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4428 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4429 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004430 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004431 */
4432enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4433 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4434 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004435 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004436};
4437
4438/**
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004439 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4440 *
4441 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4442 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4443 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4444 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4445 *
4446 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4447 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4448 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4449 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4450 */
4451void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4452 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4453 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4454 void *data);
4455
4456/**
Randy Dunlap6ef307b2008-07-03 13:52:18 -07004457 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004458 *
4459 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4460 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004461 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4462 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4463 * be used.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004464 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004465 *
4466 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004467 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004468 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004469 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4470 */
Arik Nemtsov3384d752015-03-01 09:10:15 +02004471static inline void
4472ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4473 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4474 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4475 void *data)
4476{
4477 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4478 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4479 iterator, data);
4480}
Johannes Bergdabeb342007-11-09 01:57:29 +01004481
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004482/**
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004483 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4484 *
4485 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4486 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4487 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4488 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004489 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004490 *
4491 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004492 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004493 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4494 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4495 */
4496void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
Johannes Berg8b2c9822012-11-06 20:23:30 +01004497 u32 iter_flags,
Ivo van Doorn2f561fe2008-05-10 13:40:49 +02004498 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4499 u8 *mac,
4500 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4501 void *data);
4502
4503/**
Johannes Bergc7c71062013-08-21 22:07:20 +02004504 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4505 *
4506 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4507 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4508 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
4509 *
4510 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4511 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4512 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4513 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4514 */
4515void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4516 u32 iter_flags,
4517 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4518 u8 *mac,
4519 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4520 void *data);
4521
4522/**
Arik Nemtsov0fc1e042014-10-22 12:30:59 +03004523 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
4524 *
4525 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
4526 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
4527 * function for them.
4528 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4529 *
4530 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4531 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4532 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4533 */
4534void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4535 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4536 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
4537 void *data);
4538/**
Luis R. Rodriguez42935ec2009-07-29 20:08:07 -04004539 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4540 *
4541 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
4542 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
4543 *
4544 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4545 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
4546 */
4547void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
4548
4549/**
4550 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
4551 *
4552 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
4553 * workqueue.
4554 *
4555 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
4556 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
4557 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
4558 */
4559void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4560 struct delayed_work *dwork,
4561 unsigned long delay);
4562
4563/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004564 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004565 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004566 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304567 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004568 *
4569 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004570 *
4571 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4572 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4573 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4574 */
Sujith Manoharanbd2ce6e2010-12-15 07:47:10 +05304575int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
4576 u16 timeout);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004577
4578/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004579 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004580 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004581 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4582 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
4583 *
4584 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004585 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
4586 * from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004587 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004588void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004589 u16 tid);
4590
4591/**
4592 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004593 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004594 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
Randy Dunlapea2d8b52008-10-27 09:47:03 -07004595 *
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004596 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004597 *
4598 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
4599 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
4600 * will be managed by the mac80211.
4601 */
Johannes Berg6a8579d2010-05-27 14:41:07 +02004602int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004603
4604/**
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004605 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004606 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004607 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
4608 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
4609 *
4610 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
Johannes Berg5d22c892010-06-10 10:21:40 +02004611 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
4612 * can be called from any context.
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004613 */
Johannes Bergc951ad32009-11-16 12:00:38 +01004614void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
Ron Rindjunsky0df3ef42008-01-28 14:07:15 +02004615 u16 tid);
4616
Mohamed Abbas84363e62008-04-04 16:59:58 -07004617/**
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004618 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
4619 *
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004620 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004621 * @addr: station's address
4622 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004623 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4624 *
4625 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004626 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4627 */
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004628struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
Johannes Berg17741cd2008-09-11 00:02:02 +02004629 const u8 *addr);
4630
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004631/**
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004632 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004633 *
4634 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004635 * @addr: remote station's address
4636 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004637 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004638 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
4639 *
4640 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004641 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
4642 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004643 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
4644 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
4645 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
4646 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
4647 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
4648 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
4649 * is not reliable.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004650 *
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004651 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004652 */
Ben Greear686b9cb2010-09-23 09:44:36 -07004653struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4654 const u8 *addr,
4655 const u8 *localaddr);
Johannes Berg5ed176e2009-11-04 14:42:28 +01004656
4657/**
Johannes Bergaf818582009-11-06 11:35:50 +01004658 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
4659 * @hw: the hardware
4660 * @pubsta: the station
4661 * @block: whether to block or unblock
4662 *
4663 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
4664 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
4665 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
4666 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
4667 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
4668 *
4669 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
4670 * manner.
4671 *
4672 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
4673 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
4674 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
4675 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
4676 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
4677 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
4678 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
4679 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
4680 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
4681 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
4682 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
4683 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
4684 * woke up while blocked or not.
4685 */
4686void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4687 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
4688
4689/**
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004690 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
4691 * @pubsta: the station
4692 *
4693 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
4694 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
4695 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
4696 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
4697 *
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004698 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
4699 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
4700 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
4701 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
4702 *
4703 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
4704 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
4705 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
4706 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004707 */
Johannes Berge9437892013-02-15 21:38:08 +01004708void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
Johannes Berg37fbd902011-09-29 16:04:39 +02004709
4710/**
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004711 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
4712 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4713 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
4714 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
4715 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
4716 *
4717 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
4718 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
4719 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
4720 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
4721 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
4722 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
Johannes Bergf850e002011-07-13 19:50:53 +02004723 *
4724 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
4725 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
4726 * set_key callback.
Johannes Berg830af022011-07-05 16:35:39 +02004727 */
4728void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4729 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4730 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4731 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4732 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4733 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4734 void *data),
4735 void *iter_data);
4736
4737/**
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004738 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
4739 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4740 * @iter: iterator function
4741 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
4742 *
4743 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
4744 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
4745 * places while calling into the driver.
4746 *
4747 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
4748 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
4749 * removed.
Johannes Berg8a61af62012-12-13 17:42:30 +01004750 *
4751 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
4752 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
4753 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
4754 * or not.
Johannes Berg3448c002012-09-11 17:57:42 +02004755 */
4756void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
4757 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4758 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4759 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
4760 void *data),
4761 void *iter_data);
4762
4763/**
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004764 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4765 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4766 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4767 *
4768 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4769 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
4770 * information. This function must only be called from within the
4771 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
4772 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01004773 * %NULL.
4774 *
4775 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
Juuso Oikarinena619a4c2010-11-11 08:50:18 +02004776 */
4777struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4778 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4779
4780/**
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004781 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
4782 *
Johannes Berg1ed32e42009-12-23 13:15:45 +01004783 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004784 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004785 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004786 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
Kalle Valo04de8382009-03-22 21:57:35 +02004787 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
4788 */
4789void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004790
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004791/**
4792 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
4793 *
4794 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4795 *
Johannes Bergc1288b12012-01-19 09:29:57 +01004796 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004797 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
4798 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
Johannes Berg682bd382013-01-29 13:13:50 +01004799 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
4800 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
Juuso Oikarinen1e4dcd02010-03-19 07:14:53 +02004801 *
4802 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
4803 * without connection recovery attempts.
4804 */
4805void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4806
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004807/**
Johannes Berg95acac62011-07-12 12:30:59 +02004808 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
4809 *
4810 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4811 *
4812 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
4813 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
4814 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
4815 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
4816 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
4817 *
4818 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
4819 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
4820 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
4821 * disconnect normally later.
4822 *
4823 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
4824 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
4825 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
4826 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
4827 */
4828void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4829
4830/**
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004831 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
4832 * rssi threshold triggered
4833 *
4834 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4835 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
4836 * @gfp: context flags
4837 *
Johannes Bergea086352012-01-19 09:29:58 +01004838 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
Juuso Oikarinena97c13c2010-03-23 09:02:34 +02004839 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
4840 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
4841 */
4842void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4843 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
4844 gfp_t gfp);
4845
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004846/**
Johannes Berg98f03342014-11-26 12:42:02 +01004847 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
4848 *
4849 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4850 * @gfp: context flags
4851 */
4852void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
4853
4854/**
Simon Wunderlich164eb022013-02-08 18:16:20 +01004855 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
4856 *
4857 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4858 */
4859void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4860
4861/**
Johannes Berg5ce6e432010-05-11 16:20:57 +02004862 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
4863 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4864 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
4865 *
4866 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
4867 * and wake up the suspended queues.
4868 */
4869void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
4870
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004871/**
4872 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
4873 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
Johannes Berg633dd1e2010-08-18 15:01:23 +02004874 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
Johannes Bergd1f5b7a2010-08-05 17:05:55 +02004875 *
4876 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
4877 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
4878 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
4879 */
4880void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4881 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
4882
Johannes Berge31b8212010-10-05 19:39:30 +02004883/**
Johannes Berg21f83582010-12-18 17:20:47 +01004884 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
4885 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4886 */
4887void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4888
4889/**
4890 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
4891 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4892 */
4893void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4894
Shahar Levif41ccd72011-05-22 16:10:21 +03004895/**
4896 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
4897 *
4898 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
4899 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
4900 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
4901 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
4902 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
4903 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
4904 *
4905 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4906 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
4907 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
4908 */
4909void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
4910 const u8 *addr);
4911
Felix Fietkau8c771242011-08-20 15:53:55 +02004912/**
4913 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
4914 *
4915 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
4916 * buffer.
4917 *
4918 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4919 * @ra: the peer's destination address
4920 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
4921 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
4922 */
4923void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
4924
Michal Kazior08cf42e2014-07-16 12:12:15 +02004925/**
4926 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
4927 *
4928 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4929 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4930 * reordering.
4931 *
4932 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4933 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
4934 *
4935 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4936 * @addr: station mac address
4937 * @tid: the rx tid
4938 */
4939void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4940 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4941
4942/**
4943 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
4944 *
4945 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
4946 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
4947 * reordering.
4948 *
4949 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
4950 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
4951 *
4952 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
4953 * @addr: station mac address
4954 * @tid: the rx tid
4955 */
4956void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4957 const u8 *addr, u16 tid);
4958
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004959/* Rate control API */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004960
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004961/**
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004962 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004963 *
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004964 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
4965 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
4966 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004967 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
4968 * to be filled in
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004969 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
4970 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
4971 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
4972 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
4973 * RTS threshold
4974 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
4975 * if the selected rate supports it
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004976 * @max_rate_idx: user-requested maximum (legacy) rate
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004977 * (deprecated; this will be removed once drivers get updated to use
4978 * rate_idx_mask)
Simon Wunderlichf44d4eb2012-03-07 21:31:13 +01004979 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004980 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004981 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004982 */
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02004983struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
4984 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
4985 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
4986 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
4987 struct sk_buff *skb;
4988 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
4989 bool rts, short_preamble;
4990 u8 max_rate_idx;
Jouni Malinen37eb0b12010-01-06 13:09:08 +02004991 u32 rate_idx_mask;
Felix Fietkau2ffbe6d2013-04-16 13:38:42 +02004992 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
Felix Fietkau8f0729b2010-11-11 15:07:23 +01004993 bool bss;
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004994};
4995
4996struct rate_control_ops {
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004997 const char *name;
4998 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02004999 void (*free)(void *priv);
5000
5001 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5002 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005003 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005004 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
Sujith81cb7622009-02-12 11:38:37 +05305005 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
Simon Wunderlich3de805c2013-07-08 16:55:50 +02005006 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
Johannes Berg64f68e52012-03-28 10:58:37 +02005007 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5008 u32 changed);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005009 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5010 void *priv_sta);
5011
Felix Fietkauf6845652014-11-19 20:08:08 +01005012 void (*tx_status_noskb)(void *priv,
5013 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5014 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5015 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005016 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5017 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5018 struct sk_buff *skb);
Johannes Berge6a98542008-10-21 12:40:02 +02005019 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5020 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005021
5022 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5023 struct dentry *dir);
5024 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
Antonio Quartullicca674d2014-05-19 21:53:20 +02005025
5026 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005027};
5028
5029static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5030 enum ieee80211_band band,
5031 int index)
5032{
5033 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5034}
5035
Luis R. Rodriguez4c6d4f52009-07-16 10:05:41 -07005036/**
5037 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5038 *
5039 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5040 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5041 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5042 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5043 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5044 * not null.
5045 *
5046 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5047 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5048 *
5049 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5050 * that this may be null.
5051 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5052 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5053 */
5054bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5055 void *priv_sta,
5056 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5057
5058
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005059static inline s8
5060rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5061 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5062{
5063 int i;
5064
5065 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5066 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5067 return i;
5068
5069 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005070 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005071
Johannes Berg54d50262011-11-04 18:07:43 +01005072 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005073 return 0;
5074}
5075
Luis R. Rodriguezb770b432009-07-16 10:15:09 -07005076static inline
5077bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5078 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5079{
5080 unsigned int i;
5081
5082 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5083 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5084 return true;
5085 return false;
5086}
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005087
Felix Fietkau0d528d82013-04-22 16:14:41 +02005088/**
5089 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5090 *
5091 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5092 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5093 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5094 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5095 *
5096 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5097 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5098 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5099 */
5100int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5101 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5102 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5103
Johannes Berg631ad702014-01-20 23:29:34 +01005104int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5105void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
Johannes Berg4b7679a2008-09-18 18:14:18 +02005106
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005107static inline bool
5108conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5109{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005110 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005111}
5112
5113static inline bool
5114conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5115{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005116 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5117 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005118}
5119
5120static inline bool
5121conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5122{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005123 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5124 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005125}
5126
5127static inline bool
5128conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5129{
Karl Beldan675a0b02013-03-25 16:26:57 +01005130 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005131}
5132
5133static inline bool
5134conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5135{
Rostislav Lisovy041f6072014-04-02 15:31:55 +02005136 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5137 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5138 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
Luis R. Rodriguez10c806b2008-12-23 15:58:36 -08005139}
5140
Johannes Berg2ca27bc2010-09-16 14:58:23 +02005141static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5142ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5143{
5144 if (p2p) {
5145 switch (type) {
5146 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5147 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5148 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5149 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5150 default:
5151 break;
5152 }
5153 }
5154 return type;
5155}
5156
5157static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5158ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5159{
5160 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5161}
5162
Meenakshi Venkataraman615f7b92011-07-08 08:46:22 -07005163void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5164 int rssi_min_thold,
5165 int rssi_max_thold);
5166
5167void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
Arik Nemtsov768db342011-09-28 14:12:51 +03005168
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005169/**
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005170 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005171 *
5172 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5173 *
Yacine Belkadi0ae997d2013-01-12 13:54:14 +01005174 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5175 *
5176 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5177 * applicable.
Wey-Yi Guy0d8a0a12012-04-20 11:57:00 -07005178 */
Wey-Yi Guy1dae27f2012-04-13 12:02:57 -07005179int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5180
Johannes Bergcd8f7cb2013-01-22 12:34:29 +01005181/**
5182 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5183 * @vif: virtual interface
5184 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5185 * @gfp: allocation flags
5186 *
5187 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5188 */
5189void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5190 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5191 gfp_t gfp);
5192
Felix Fietkau06be6b12013-10-14 18:01:00 +02005193/**
5194 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5195 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5196 * @vif: virtual interface
5197 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5198 * @band: the band to transmit on
5199 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5200 *
5201 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5202 */
5203bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5204 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5205 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5206
Felix Fietkaua7022e62013-12-16 21:49:14 +01005207/**
5208 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5209 *
5210 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5211 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5212 *
5213 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5214 *
5215 * private:
5216 *
5217 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5218 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5219 */
5220struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5221 u32 next_tsf;
5222 bool has_next_tsf;
5223
5224 u8 absent;
5225
5226 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5227 struct {
5228 u32 start;
5229 u32 duration;
5230 u32 interval;
5231 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5232};
5233
5234/**
5235 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5236 *
5237 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5238 * @data: NoA tracking data
5239 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5240 *
5241 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5242 */
5243int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5244 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5245
5246/**
5247 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5248 *
5249 * @data: NoA tracking data
5250 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5251 */
5252void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5253
Arik Nemtsovc887f0d32014-06-11 17:18:25 +03005254/**
5255 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5256 * @vif: virtual interface
5257 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5258 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5259 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5260 * @gfp: allocation flags
5261 *
5262 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5263 */
5264void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5265 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5266 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005267
5268/**
Liad Kaufmanb6da9112014-11-19 13:47:38 +02005269 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5270 *
5271 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5272 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5273 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5274 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5275 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5276 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5277 *
5278 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5279 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5280 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5281 *
5282 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5283 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5284 *
5285 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5286 */
5287int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5288
5289/**
5290 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5291 *
5292 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5293 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5294 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5295 *
5296 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5297 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5298 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5299 *
5300 * @sta: the station
5301 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5302 */
5303void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5304
5305/**
Andrei Otcheretianskia7f3a762014-10-22 15:22:49 +03005306 * ieee80211_ie_split - split an IE buffer according to ordering
5307 *
5308 * @ies: the IE buffer
5309 * @ielen: the length of the IE buffer
5310 * @ids: an array with element IDs that are allowed before
5311 * the split
5312 * @n_ids: the size of the element ID array
5313 * @offset: offset where to start splitting in the buffer
5314 *
5315 * This function splits an IE buffer by updating the @offset
5316 * variable to point to the location where the buffer should be
5317 * split.
5318 *
5319 * It assumes that the given IE buffer is well-formed, this
5320 * has to be guaranteed by the caller!
5321 *
5322 * It also assumes that the IEs in the buffer are ordered
5323 * correctly, if not the result of using this function will not
5324 * be ordered correctly either, i.e. it does no reordering.
5325 *
5326 * The function returns the offset where the next part of the
5327 * buffer starts, which may be @ielen if the entire (remainder)
5328 * of the buffer should be used.
5329 */
5330size_t ieee80211_ie_split(const u8 *ies, size_t ielen,
5331 const u8 *ids, int n_ids, size_t offset);
Jiri Bencf0706e82007-05-05 11:45:53 -07005332#endif /* MAC80211_H */